Sony Pmw 500 Users Manual

Sony-Pmw-500-Operation-Manual-797248 sony-pmw-500-operation-manual-797248

PMW-500 to the manual 87e039ab-c5f4-47a0-ad7c-ddb9e9f52544

PMW-500 - Operation Manual PMW-500 Free User Guide for Sony Camcorder, Manual - page6

2015-01-23

: Sony Sony-Pmw-500-Users-Manual-286860 sony-pmw-500-users-manual-286860 sony pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 203 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

SOLID-STATE MEMORY CAMCORDER
PMW-500
OPERATION MANUAL [English]
1st Edition (Revised 2)
4260128030
The supplied CD-ROM includes operation manuals for the PMW-500 Solid-State
Memory Camcorder (English, Japanese, French, German, Italian, Spanish and Chinese
versions) in PDF format.
For more details, see “Using the CD-ROM” on page 14.
PMW-500
(SYM)
4-260-128-03 (1)
Sony Corporation
Printed on recycled paper.
Printed in Japan
2011.03 32
© 2010
SOLID-STATE MEMORY CAMCORDER PMW-500
2
To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, do not
expose this apparatus to
rain or moisture.
To avoid electrical shock,
do not open the cabinet.
Refer servicing to qualified
personnel only.
Important Safety Instructions
• Read these instructions.
• Keep these instructions.
• Heed all warnings.
• Follow all instructions.
• Do not use this apparatus near water.
• Clean only with dry cloth.
• Do not block any ventilation openings.
Install in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
• Do not install near any heat sources such
as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
• Do not defeat the safety purpose of the
polarized or grounding-type plug. A
polarized plug has two blades with one
wider than the other. A grounding-type
plug has two blades and a third grounding
prong. The wide blade or the third prong
are provided for your safety. If the
provided plug does not fit into your outlet,
consult an electrician for replacement of
the obsolete outlet.
• Protect the power cord from being walked
on or pinched particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
• Only use attachments/accessories
specified by the manufacturer.
• Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is
damaged, liquid has been spilled or
objects have fallen into the apparatus, the
apparatus has been exposed to rain or
moisture, does not operate normally, or
has been dropped.
WARNING
Excessive sound pressure from earphones
and headphones can cause hearing loss.
In order to use this product safely, avoid
prolonged listening at excessive sound
pressure levels.
For the customers in the U.S.A.
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation. If this equipment
does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
- Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
You are cautioned that any changes or
modifications not expressly approved in this
manual could void your authority to operate
this equipment.
All interface cables used to connect
peripherals must be shielded in order to
comply with the limits for a digital device
pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC
Rules.
If you have any questions about this product,
you may call;
WARNING
3
Sony Customer Information Service Center
1-800-222-7669 or http://www.sony.com/
For the customers in Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
For the customers in Europe
This product with the CE marking complies
with the EMC Directive issued by the
Commission of the European Community.
Compliance with this directive implies
conformity to the following European
standards:
• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic
Interference(Emission)
• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic
Susceptibility(Immunity)
This product is intended for use in the
following Electromagnetic Environments: E1
(residential), E2 (commercial and light
industrial), E3 (urban outdoors), E4
(controlled EMC environment, ex. TV
studio).
The manufacturer of this product is Sony
Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku,
Tokyo, Japan.
The Authorized Representative for EMC and
product safety is Sony Deutschland GmbH,
Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327 Stuttgart,
Germany.
For the State of California, USA only
Perchlorate Material - special handling may
apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
Perchlorate Material : Lithium battery
contains perchlorate.
For the customers in Taiwan only
Afin de réduire les risques
d’incendie ou
d’électrocution, ne pas
exposer cet appareil à la
pluie ou à l’humidité.
Afin d’écarter tout risque
d’électrocution, garder le
coffret fermé. Ne confier
l’entretien de l’appareil
qu’à un personnel qualifié.
AVERTISSEMENT
Une pression acoustique excessive en
provenance des écouteurs ou du casque
peut provoquer une baisse de l’acuité
auditive.
Pour utiliser ce produit en toute sécurité,
évitez l’écoute prolongée à des pressions
sonores excessi
Pour les clients au Canada
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est
conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Pour les clients en Europe
Ce produit portant la marque CE est
conforme à la Directive sur la compatibilité
électromagnétique (EMC) émise par la
Commission de la Communauté
européenne.
Declaration of Conformity
Trade Name : SONY
Model : PMW-500
Responsible party : Sony Electronics Inc.
Address : 16530 Via Esprillo,
San Diego, CA
92127 U.S.A.
Telephone Number : 858-942-2230
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
AVERTISSEMENT
4
La conformité à cette directive implique la
conformité aux normes européennes
suivantes :
• EN55103-1 : Interférences
électromagnétiques (émission)
• EN55103-2 : Sensibilité
électromagnétique (immunité)
Ce produit est prévu pour être utilisé dans
les environnements électromagnétiques
suivants : E1 (résidentiel), E2 (commercial et
industrie légère), E3 (urbain extérieur) et E4
(environnement EMC contrôlé, ex. studio de
télévision).
Le fabricant de ce produit est Sony
Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku,
Tokyo, Japon.
Le représentant autorisé pour EMC et la
sécurité des produits est Sony Deutschland
GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327
Stuttgart, Allemagne.
Um die Gefahr von Bränden
oder elektrischen Schlägen
zu verringern, darf dieses
Gerät nicht Regen oder
Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt
werden.
Um einen elektrischen
Schlag zu vermeiden, darf
das Gehäuse nicht geöffnet
werden. Überlassen Sie
Wartungsarbeiten stets nur
qualifiziertem
Fachpersonal.
WARNUNG
Zu hoher Schalldruck von Ohrhörern und
Kopfhörern kann Gehörschäden
verursachen.
Um dieses Produkt sicher zu verwenden,
vermeiden Sie längeres Hören bei sehr
hohen Schalldruckpegeln.
Für Kunden in Europa
Dieses Produkt besitzt die CE-
Kennzeichnung und erfüllt die EMV-
Richtlinie der EG-Kommission.
Angewandte Normen:
• EN55103-1: Elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit (Störaussendung)
• EN55103-2: Elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit (Störfestigkeit)
Für die folgenden elektromagnetischen
Umgebungen: E1 (Wohnbereich), E2
(kommerzieller und in beschränktem Maße
industrieller Bereich), E3 (Stadtbereich im
Freien) und E4 (kontrollierter EMV-Bereich,
z.B. Fernsehstudio).
Der Hersteller dieses Produkts ist Sony
Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku,
Tokyo, Japan.
Der autorisierte Repräsentant für EMV und
Produktsicherheit ist Sony Deutschland
GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327
Stuttgart, Deutschland.
WARNUNG
Table of Contents 5
Table of Contents
Foreword .................................................................................................... 11
Before Use....................................................................................... 11
Mode Indications in This Manual ............................................................ 11
Chapter 1 : Overview
Features ...................................................................................................... 12
Using the CD-ROM ................................................................................... 14
Reading the CD-ROM Manuals ............................................................... 14
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls...................................... 15
Power Supply .................................................................................. 15
Accessory Attachments................................................................... 16
Operating and Connectors Section.................................................. 17
LCD Monitor................................................................................... 26
HDVF-20A Viewfinder (Optional)................................................. 28
CBK-VF01 Viewfinder (Optional) ................................................. 29
Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen........................................ 30
Chapter 2 : Preparations
Preparing a Power Supply ........................................................................ 35
Using a Battery Pack....................................................................... 35
Using AC Power ............................................................................. 36
Attaching the Viewfinder.......................................................................... 37
Attaching the Viewfinder................................................................ 37
Adjusting the Viewfinder Position.................................................. 37
Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket ........................ 38
Detaching the Eyepiece................................................................... 39
Adjusting the Viewfinder Focus and Screen................................... 39
Setting the Area of Use .............................................................................. 40
Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock ........................................... 41
Mounting and Adjusting the Lens............................................................ 42
Adjusting the Flange Focal Length................................................. 42
Preparing the Audio Input System .......................................................... 43
Connecting a Microphone to the MIC IN Connector...................... 43
Connecting Microphones to the AUDIO IN Connectors................ 44
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
6
Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner (for a UHF Wireless Microphone
System) ..................................................................................... 45
Connecting Line Input Audio Equipment ....................................... 47
Tripod Mounting ....................................................................................... 48
Connecting a Video Light ......................................................................... 49
Using the Shoulder Strap .......................................................................... 49
Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position ....................................................... 50
Chapter 3 : Adjustments and Settings
Setting the Video Format .......................................................................... 51
Selecting the Recording Mode........................................................ 53
Changing the Video Format ............................................................ 53
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance ............................. 54
Adjusting the Black Balance........................................................... 54
Adjusting the White Balance .......................................................... 55
Setting the Electronic Shutter................................................................... 57
Shutter Modes ................................................................................. 57
Selecting the Shutter Mode and Shutter Speed ............................... 57
Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment ............ 59
Adjusting the Audio Level ........................................................................ 60
Manually Adjusting the Audio Levels of the Audio Inputs from the
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 Connectors ......................................... 60
Manually Adjusting the Audio Level of the MIC IN Connector .... 60
Recording Audio on Channels 3 and 4 ........................................... 61
Setting the Time Data................................................................................ 62
Setting the Timecode....................................................................... 62
Setting the User Bits........................................................................ 63
Synchronizing the Timecode........................................................... 63
Setting Shot Data ....................................................................................... 65
Creating a Shot ID........................................................................... 65
Checking Camcorder Settings and Status Information
(Status Screens).................................................................................... 66
Chapter 4 : Shooting
Handling SxS Memory Cards................................................................... 68
About SxS Memory Cards .............................................................. 68
Loading and Ejecting SxS Memory Cards...................................... 69
Selecting the SxS Memory Card to Use.......................................... 70
Table of Contents 7
Formatting (Initializing) SxS Memory Cards ................................. 70
If You Load a Memory Card Formatted in the Different Recording
Mode from the Mode Selected on the Camcorder.................... 71
Checking the Remaining Recording Time...................................... 71
Restoring SxS Memory Cards......................................................... 72
Handling USB Flash Drives ...................................................................... 73
Formatting (Initializing) USB Flash Drives.................................... 73
Restoring USB Flash Drives ........................................................... 74
Basic Operations ........................................................................................ 74
Playing Recorded Clips................................................................... 76
Deleting Recorded Clips ................................................................. 77
Advanced Operations ................................................................................ 77
Recording Shot Marks..................................................................... 77
Setting OK Marks ........................................................................... 78
Starting to Record from Pre-stored Video
(Picture Cache Function) .......................................................... 78
Recording Time-lapse Video (Interval Rec Function).................... 79
Shooting Stop Motion Animations (Frame Rec Function) ............. 81
Shooting with Slow & Quick Motion ............................................. 82
Recording with the Clip Continuous Rec Function ........................ 83
Framing Shots with the Freeze Mix Function................................. 84
Recording Proxy Data ............................................................................... 85
Recording Proxy Data While Recording Clips ............................... 85
Recording Proxy Data for Existing Clips........................................ 86
Deleting All Proxy Data from a USB Flash Drive.......................... 86
Planning Metadata Operations ................................................................ 87
Loading a Planning Metadata File into Camcorder’s Internal
Memory..................................................................................... 87
Defining Clip Names in Planning Metadata ................................... 88
Defining Shot Mark Names in Planning Metadata ......................... 90
Chapter 5 : Clip Operations
Clip Playback ............................................................................................. 91
Thumbnail Screen ........................................................................... 91
Playing Clips ................................................................................... 94
Using Thumbnails to Search Inside Clips....................................... 95
Thumbnail Operations .............................................................................. 96
THUMBNAIL Menu Configuration ............................................... 96
Basic THUMBNAIL Menu Operations.......................................... 98
Changing the Thumbnail Screen Type............................................ 98
Displaying Clip Properties ............................................................ 100
Adding and Deleting OK, NG or KP Marks................................. 101
Table of Contents
8
Protecting Clips............................................................................. 102
Copying Clips ............................................................................... 102
Deleting Clips................................................................................ 103
Displaying the Expand Thumbnail Screen.................................... 104
Displaying the Essence Mark Thumbnail Screen ......................... 105
Adding and Deleting Shot Marks.................................................. 106
Changing Clip Index Pictures ....................................................... 106
Dividing Clips ............................................................................... 106
Chapter 6 : Menu and Detailed Settings
Setup Menu Organization and Levels.................................................... 107
Setup Menu Organization ............................................................. 107
Setup Menu Levels........................................................................ 107
Basic Setup Menu Operations ................................................................ 109
Menu List.................................................................................................. 111
USER Menu (Factory Default Configuration).............................. 111
OPERATION Menu...................................................................... 112
PAINT Menu................................................................................. 129
MAINTENANCE Menu ............................................................... 135
FILE Menu.................................................................................... 150
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches ......................................... 155
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 0 Switch ........ 155
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 2 Switch ........ 156
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 1 and 3 Switches,
the ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 Switches, and the COLOR TEMP.
Button...................................................................................... 156
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the RET Button on the Lens 159
Chapter 7 : Saving and Loading User Setting Data
Saving and Loading Settings................................................................... 160
Saving Setting Data....................................................................... 160
Loading Setting Data..................................................................... 161
Resetting a File after Changing Its Contents................................. 162
Saving and Loading Scene Files ............................................................. 162
Saving Scene Files ........................................................................ 162
Loading Scene Files ...................................................................... 163
Saving and Loading Lens Files............................................................... 164
Setting Lens File Data................................................................... 164
Saving Lens Files .......................................................................... 164
Loading Lens Files........................................................................ 164
Table of Contents 9
Loading Lens Files Automatically................................................ 165
Saving and Loading User Files ............................................................... 165
Saving User Files .......................................................................... 165
Loading Setting Data..................................................................... 166
Chapter 8 : Connecting External Devices
Connecting External Monitors ............................................................... 167
Operating Clips with a Computer.......................................................... 169
Using the ExpressCard Slot of a Computer .................................. 169
USB Connection with a Computer................................................ 169
Connecting an External Device (i.LINK Connection).......................... 171
Recording the Camera Picture on an External Device.................. 171
Nonlinear Editing.......................................................................... 172
Recording External Input Signals ................................................. 172
Configuring a Shooting and Recording System .................................... 173
Chapter 9 : Maintenance
Testing the Camcorder............................................................................ 174
Maintenance ............................................................................................. 174
Cleaning the Viewfinder ............................................................... 174
Note about the Battery Terminal................................................... 175
Operation Warnings................................................................................ 176
Error Indication............................................................................. 176
Warning Indication........................................................................ 177
Appendix
Important Notes on Operation ............................................................... 184
Exchanging the Battery of the Internal Clock ...................................... 186
Specifications............................................................................................ 186
General .......................................................................................... 186
Camera Block................................................................................ 187
Audio Block .................................................................................. 188
Display .......................................................................................... 188
Media Block .................................................................................. 188
Inputs/Outputs ............................................................................... 188
Supplied Accessories .................................................................... 189
Recommended Additional Equipment .......................................... 189
Table of Contents
10
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories .................................. 191
About i.LINK ........................................................................................... 192
MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License .............................................. 193
MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio License ............................................... 193
About Bitmap Fonts ................................................................................ 193
About OpenSSL ....................................................................................... 194
Index.......................................................................................................... 197
Foreword / Mode Indications in This Manual 11
After purchasing the PMW-500 Solid-State
Memory Camcorder, before operating, it is
necessary to set the area of use.
(Unless this setting is made, the camcorder will
not operate.)
For details of these settings, see “Setting the Area of
Use” (page 40).
Note
Before attaching/removing optional components or
accessories to/from the PMW-500 (referred to as “the
camcorder”), be sure to turn the power of the camcorder
off.
Some functions and information are available
only when this camcorder is in a specific
operating mode. This manual indicates those
modes by using the following marks. When these
marks appear, the associated function or
information is available only in that mode.
HD mode: When OPERATION >Format >HD/
SD in the setup menu is set to [HD].
UDF mode: When OPERATION >Format >File
System in the setup menu is set to [UDF].
FAT mode: When OPERATION >Format >File
System in the setup menu is set to [FAT].
FAT-HD mode: When OPERATION >Format
>File System in the setup menu is set to [FAT]
and OPERATION >Format >HD/SD in the setup
menu is set to [HD].
FAT-SD mode: When OPERATION >Format
>File System in the setup menu is set to [FAT]
and OPERATION >Format >HD/SD in the setup
menu is set to [SD].
Foreword
Before Use
Mode Indications in This
Manual
HD
UDF
FAT
FAT-HD
FAT-SD
Features
12
Chapter 1 Overview
2/3-inch full-HD “PowerHAD FX” CCDs
• IT (Interline Transfer) 2/3-inch progressive
image sensors with 207 million pixels, for full
HD resolution (1920 × 1080)
• “PowerHAD FX” CCDs, featuring a signal
processing ASIC with 14-bit A/D converters
These new image sensor technologies enable
the capture of very high-quality images, with
F11 (59.94i) and F12 (50i) sensitivity and an
SN ratio of 59 dB. 1)
1) With noise suppression on (off value is 54 dB) Noise
suppression uses proprietary Sony signal processing
technology to suppress noise in highfrequency
regions.
SxS memory cards as recording media
Using SxS memory cards, the camcorder offers
nonlinear capabilities such as instant random
access and file-based operation.
You can choose FAT or UDF as the file system
for recording media.
Light weight, low power consumption
Design features custom video signal processing
ICs, and SxS memory card recording enable
fanless operation and power consumption of 27
W or less. The camcorder’s light weight (3.4 kg
(7 lb 7.9 oz)) and low center of gravity make it
easy to carry on the shoulder while ensuring
superior stability.
HD recording using the “MPEG-2 Long
GOP” codec and SD recording in MPEG
IMX50/DVCAM format
The camcorder records 1920 × 1080, 1440 ×
1080, and 1280 × 720 HD images using “MPEG-
2 Long GOP” codec compression.
For recording in FAT mode, it offers a choice of
bit rates: either 35 Mbps (HQ mode) or 25 Mbps
(SP mode).
For recording in UDF mode, it offers a choice of
bit rates: either 35 Mbps (HQ mode) or 50 Mbps
(HD422 mode).
By utilizing an efficient compression format, the
camcorder records high-quality HD images for
long recording time of approx. 60 minutes at 50
Mbps (HD422 mode) or approx. 90 minutes at 35
Mbps (HQ mode) on a single 32-GB SxS memory
card (when the recording mode is UDF).
It can also record and play two SD formats:
MPEG IMX 50 Mbps and DVCAM 25 Mbps. 1)
1) CBK-MD01 SD Record and Playback Key required.
For details, contact a Sony service representative
Multi-format support
The camcorder supports interlace format
recording (1080/59.94i or 1080/50i), progressive
format recording (1080/29.97P, 1080/23.98P,
720/59.94P, 720/29.97P, 720/23.98P, or 1080/
25P, 720/50P, 720/25P), thus offering the
flexibility needed for worldwide HD recording.
It also supports recording and playback of SD
signals (both NTSC and PAL). The camcorder
has an optional capability to record and play back
SD signals in IMX/DVCAM format, and can
output HD signals down-converted to SD.
A variety of functions for improved
performance under various shooting
conditions
• Picture Cache function
• Optical ND filters and electrical CC filters
• Hyper gamma
• Slow shutter function
• Clip Continuous Rec function
• Frame Recording function
• Time lapse function (interval recording)
• Slow & quick motion function
• Freeze mix function
• Live & Play function
• Digital extender function 1)
• Focus magnification function
• Assignable switches
Chapter1Overview
Features
Features 13
Chapter 1 Overview
• 3.5-inch high-resolution color LCD monitor
• Remote control
1) When the optional CBK-HD02 SDI/Composite Input
and 50-pin Interface is installed
Recording data to USB flash drives and
reading data from USB flash drives (UDF
mode)
You can connect USB flash drives to the external
device connector to record proxy data or read
planning metadata. You can also save setup menu
settings to USB flash drives and load menu
settings from USB flash drives into the
camcorder.
Wireless LAN support
You can connect this camcorder to a computer
over a wireless LAN (Wi-Fi connection) by
installing the optional CBK-UPG01 Hardware
Upgrade Key and connecting the optional CBK-
WA01 Wi-Fi Adapter to the external device
connector.
A Wi-Fi connection allows you to transfer
planning metadata from a computer to this
camcorder, and to transfer clips and other files
from this camcorder to a computer. You can also
use the Live Logging function to transfer proxy
AV data to a computer as you shoot, for logging
of the video currently being shot.
Inherits unique features of XDCAM series
The camcorder inherits the workflow features of
the XDCAM series, including thumbnail display
and metadata management, and improves them
by introducing an improved man-machine
interface.
Supports two viewfinder types
Depending on the application, you can use either
the optional HDVF series viewfinder or the CBK-
VF01 color viewfinder.
Camcorder system configuration
When you install the optional CBK-HD02 SDI/
Composite Input and 50-pin Interface, you can
mount the XDCA-55 HD Camera Adaptor and
connect the XDCU-50 HD Camera Extension
Unit to configure a system for shooting and
recording.
When the CBK-HD02 is installed, you can also
connect the HDCA-702 MPEG TS Adaptor
instead of the camera adaptor. This allows you to
convert this camcorder’s HDSDI output to a
MPEG HD transport stream.
Using the CD-ROM / Reading the CD-ROM Manuals
14
Chapter 1 Overview
Two CD-ROMs are supplied with the camcorder.
The CD-ROM labeled “Manuals for Solid-State
Memory Camcorder” contains the PDF files of
OPERATION MANUAL and SUPPLEMENT
for the camcorder (English, Japanese, French,
German, Italian, Spanish and Chinese).
The CD-ROM labeled “Utility Software for
XDCAM” contains application and device driver
software required to access to SxS memory cards
from a computer and to manage material shot
with the camcorder.
Information about how to install the software is
provided in PDF format.
Note
You must install the SxS device driver and SxS UDF
driver software on your computer if it is equipped with
an ExpressCard slot and you want to use it to access SxS
memory cards, if you want to connect the camcorder to
your computer, and if you want to connect an optional
SBAC-US10 SxS Memory Card USB Reader/Writer to
the computer.
Preparations
The following program must be installed on your
computer in order to read the documents
contained on the CD-ROM.
Adobe Reader Version 6.0 or higher
Memo
If Adobe Reader is not installed, you can download it
from the following URL:
http://www.adobe.com/
Adobe and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other
countries.
To read the documents
Do the following:
1Insert the CD-ROM in your CD-ROM
drive.
A cover page appears automatically in your
browser.
If it does not appear automatically in the
browser, double-click on the index.htm file
on the CD-ROM.
2Select and click on the manual that you
wish to read.
This opens the PDF file.
Memo
The files may not be displayed properly, depending on
the version of Adobe Reader. In such a case, install the
latest version you can download from the URL
mentioned in “Preparations” above.
Note
If you have lost or damaged the CD-ROM, you can
purchase a new one to replace it. Contact a Sony service
representative.
Using the CD-ROM Reading the CD-ROM
Manuals
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 15
Chapter 1 Overview
aLIGHT switch
Determines how a video light connected to the
LIGHT connector (see page 16) is turned on and
off.
AUTO: When the POWER switch of the video
light is in the on position, the video light is
turned on automatically while the camcorder
is recording.
MANUAL: You can turn the video light on or off
manually, using its own switch.
Note
When the camcorder is set for recording in Picture Cache
mode, it is not possible to turn on the light before
operation to start recording is carried out (or while data
is being stored in memory).
bPOWER switch
Turns the main power supply on and off.
cDC IN (DC power input) connector
(XLR type, 4-pin, male)
To operate the camcorder from an AC power
supply, connect an optional DC power cord to this
terminal and then connect the cord to the DC
output terminal of the BC-L70, BC-L160, or
another battery charger.
dDC OUT 12V (DC power output)
connector (4-pin, female)
Supplies power for an optional WRR-860C/861/
862 UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner
(maximum 0.5 A).
Note
Do not connect any equipment other than the UHF
synthesized diversity tuner.
eBattery attachment shoe
Attach a BP-GL95/GL65/L80S/L60S Battery
Pack. Alternatively, you can attach an AC-
DN2B/DN10 AC Adaptor to operate the
camcorder on AC power supply.
For details, see “Preparing a Power Supply”
(page 35).
For details, see “Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner
(for a UHF Wireless Microphone System)”
(page 45).
Note
For your safety, and to ensure proper operation of the
camcorder, Sony recommends the use of the following
battery packs: BP-GL95, BP-GL65, BP-L60S, and
BP-L80S.
Adaptor connector
Enables connection of an XDCA-55 HD Camera
Adaptor or an HDCA-702 MPEG TS Adaptor. To
connect an adaptor, remove the cover from the
connector and install the optional CBK-HD02
SDI/COMPOSITE Input and 50 Pin Interface.
Locations and Functions
of Parts and Controls
Power Supply
Adaptor connector (see page 15
)
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
16
Chapter 1 Overview
aShoulder strap fitting
Attach the supplied shoulder strap (see page 49).
bAccessory fitting shoe
Attach an optional accessory such as a video light
(see page 49).
cViewfinder front-to-back positioning
lever
To adjust the viewfinder position in the front-to-
back direction, loosen this lever and the LOCK
knob. After adjustment, retighten this lever and
the LOCK knob.
dViewfinder left-to-right positioning ring
Loosen this ring to adjust the left-to-right position
of the viewfinder (see page 37).
eViewfinder fitting shoe
Attach the viewfinder.
fVF (viewfinder) connectors (26-pin,
rectangular and 20-pin, round)
The analog interface connector (20-pin) is for
connection of an HDVF series viewfinder, and
the digital interface connector (26-pin) is for
connection of an HD viewfinder CBK-VF01.
Use a connection cable to connect your
viewfinder to the corresponding connector.
Note
Do not connect viewfinders to both connectors at the
same time.
gLens mount securing rubber
After locking the lens in position using the lens
locking lever, fit this rubber over the lower of the
two projections. This fixes the lens mount,
preventing it from coming loose.
hViewfinder front-to-back positioning
knob (LOCK knob)
Loosen this knob to adjust the front-to-back
position of the viewfinder (see page 37).
iFitting for optional microphone holder
Fit an optional CAC-12 Microphone Holder (see
page 44).
jShoulder pad
Raise the shoulder pad fixing lever to adjust the
position in the front-to-rear direction. Adjust the
position for maximum convenience when
operating the camcorder on your shoulder (see
page 50).
kLIGHT (video light) connector (2-pin,
female)
A video light with a maximum power
consumption of 50 W, such as the Anton Bauer
Ultralight 2 or equivalent can be connected (see
page 49).
lLens cable clamp
Clamp a lens cable.
mMIC IN (microphone input) (+48 V)
connector (XLR type, 5-pin, female)
Connect a stereo microphone to this connector.
The power (+48 V) is supplied via this connector.
nLENS connector (12-pin)
Connect a lens cable to this connector.
Note
When connecting or disconnecting the lens cable to this
connector, power off the camcorder first.
oTripod mount
When using the camcorder on a tripod, attach the
tripod adaptor (optional).
Accessory Attachments
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 17
Chapter 1 Overview
pLens mount (special bayonet mount)
Attach the lens.
Consult a Sony service representative for
information about available lenses.
qLens locking lever
After inserting the lens in the lens mount, rotate
the lens mount ring with this lever to lock the lens
in position.
After locking the lens, be sure to use the lens
mount securing rubber to prevent the lens from
becoming detached.
rLens mount cap
Remove by pushing up the lens locking lever.
When no lens is mounted, keep this cap fitted for
protection from dust.
Front
aREC START (recording start) button
Press to start recording. Press it again to stop
recording. The effect is the same as that of the
REC button on the lens.
bSHUTTER selector
Set to ON to use the electronic shutter. Push to
SELECT to switch the shutter speed or shutter
mode setting. When this switch is operated, the
new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for
about three seconds.
For details, see “Setting the Electronic Shutter”
(page 57).
cFILTER selector
Switches between four ND filters built into this
camcorder.
When this selector is used, the new setting
appears on the viewfinder screen for about three
seconds.
You can change a MAINTENANCE menu
setting so that different white balance settings can
be stored for different FILTER selector positions.
This allows you to automatically obtain optimum
white balance for the current shooting conditions
in linkage with the filter selection.
For details, see “Adjusting the White Balance”
(page 55).
dMENU knob
Changes the item selection or a setting within the
menu (see page 109).
eAUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/
black balance adjustment) switch
Activates the automatic white/black balance
adjustment functions.
WHITE: Adjust the white balance automatically.
If the WHITE BAL switch (see page 19) is
set to A or B, the white balance setting is
stored in the corresponding memory. If the
WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST, the
automatic white balance adjustment function
does not operate.
BLACK: Adjust the black set and black balance
automatically.
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even
when the ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)
function is operating.
If you push the switch to the WHITE side once
more during the automatic white balance
adjustment, the adjustment is cancelled and the
Operating and Connectors Section
FILTER selector
setting
ND filter
1CLEAR
21/4 ND (attenuates light to
approximately 1/4)
31/16 ND (attenuates light to
approximately 1/16)
41/64 ND (attenuates light to
approximately 1/64)
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
18
Chapter 1 Overview
white balance setting returns to the original
setting.
If you push the switch to the BLACK side once
more during the automatic black balance
adjustment, the adjustment is cancelled and the
black balance setting returns to the original
setting.
fMIC (microphone) LEVEL control
Adjusts the input level of audio channels 1, 2, 3
and 4 (see page 60).
Right side (near the front)
aASSIGN. (assignable) 1/2/3 switches
You can assign the desired functions to these
switches on OPERATION >Assignable SW in
the setup menu (see page 155).
Off is assigned to the ASSIGN 1/2/3 switches as
the factory default setting.
The ASSIGN.1/3 switches are provided with an
indicator to show whether a function is assigned
to the switch (ON) or not (OFF).
bCOLOR TEMP. (color temperature)
button
Press to light the button and change the color
temperature for shooting (factory default setting).
You can use this as an assignable switch (see
page 155).
cALARM (alarm tone volume
adjustment) knob
Controls the volume of the warning tone that is
output via the built-in speaker or optional
earphones. When the knob is turned to the
minimum position, no sound can be heard.
However, if MAINTENANCE >Audio >Min
Alarm Volume in the setup menu is set to [Set],
the alarm tone is audible even when this volume
control is at the minimum position.
dMONITOR (monitor volume
adjustment) knob
Controls the volume of the sound other than the
warning tone that is output via the built-in speaker
or earphones. When the knob is turned to the
minimum position, no sound can be heard.
eMONITOR (audio monitor selection)
switches
By means of combinations of the two switches,
you can select audio that you want to hear through
the built-in speaker or earphones.
Position of down-side switch: CH-1/2
Position of down-side switch: CH-3/4
Position of up-side
switch
Audio output
CH-1/CH-3 Channel 1 audio
MIX Channels 1 and 2 mixed
audio (stereo) a)
CH-2/CH-4 Channel 2 audio
Position of up-side
switch
Audio output
CH-1/CH-3 Channel 3 audio
MIX Channels 3 and 4 mixed
audio (stereo) a)
CH-2/CH-4 Channel 4 audio
ALARM
Minimum Maximum
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 19
Chapter 1 Overview
a) By connecting stereo headphones to the EARPHONE
jack, you can hear the audio in stereo. (Under
MAINTENANCE >Audio in the setup menu,
Headphone Out must be set to STEREO.)
fASSIGN. (assignable) 0 switch
You can assign the desired function to this switch
on OPERATION >Assignable SW in the setup
menu (see page 156).
Off is assigned to this switch when the camcorder
is shipped from the factory.
This is a momentary type switch. Each press of
the switch turns the function assigned to this
switch on or off.
gGAIN selector
Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match
the lighting conditions during shooting. The gains
corresponding to the L, M, and H settings can be
selected on OPERATION >Gain Switch in the
setup menu (see page 119). (The factory settings
are L=0 dB, M=6 dB, and H=12 dB.)
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting
appears on the viewfinder screen for about three
seconds.
hOUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic
contrast control) switch
Switches the video signal output from the camera
module, between the following two.
BARS: Output the color bar signal.
CAM: Output the video signal being shot. When
this is selected, you can switch DCC 1) on and
off.
1) DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control): Against a very
bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the
subject, objects in the background will be lost in the
glare. The DCC function will suppress the high
intensity and restore much of the lost detail and is
particularly effective in the following cases.
• Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day
• Shooting a subject indoors, against a background
through a window
• Any high contrast scene
iWHITE BAL (white balance memory)
switch
Controls adjustment of the white balance.
PRST: Adjust the color temperature to the preset
value (the factory default setting: 3200K).
Use this setting when you have no time to
adjust the white balance.
A or B: Recall the white balance adjustment
settings already stored in A or B. Push the
AUTO W/B BAL switch (see page 17) on
the WHITE side, to automatically adjust the
white balance, and save the adjustment
settings in memory A or memory B.
B (ATW 1)): When this switch is set to B and
OPERATION >White Setting >White
Switch<B> is set to [ATW] in the setup
menu, ATW is activated.
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch
even when ATW is in use.
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting
appears on the viewfinder screen for about three
seconds.
1) ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance): The white
balance of the picture being shot is adjusted
automatically for varying lighting conditions.
jMENU ON/OFF switch
To use this switch, open the cover.
This switch is used to display the menu on the
viewfinder screen or the test signal screen. Each
time the switch is pushed down, the menu screen
is turned on and off.
The function of this switch is the same as that of
the MENU button in the thumbnail screen
operations section.
Note
This switch has different functions depending on
whether or not a menu is displayed.
kMENU CANCEL/PRST (preset) /
ESCAPE switch
To use the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch, open the cover.
Note
It is not possible to turn off the menu screen by closing
the cover.
Use the switch in the following way when the
menu is not displayed.
CANCEL/PRST: Each time this switch is
pushed upward, a window to confirm the
menu settings and status of the camcorder
appears on the viewfinder screen (see
page 66). The window consists of five pages,
which are switched each time the switch is
pushed upward. Each page is displayed for
about 10 seconds.
ESCAPE: To clear the page immediately after
display, push this switch down to the OFF
position.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
20
Chapter 1 Overview
Use the switch in the following way when the
menu is displayed.
CANCEL/PRST: Pushing this switch up to this
position after a setting is changed in the setup
menu displays the message to confirm
whether the previous settings are cancelled.
Pushing this switch up to this position again
cancels the previous settings.
Pushing this switch up to this position before
a setting is changed in the setup menu or after
a setting change is cancelled in the setup
menu displays the message to confirm
whether the setting is reset to the initial
value.
Pushing this switch up to this position again
resets the settings to the initial value.
ESCAPE: Use this switch when the menu page,
which has a hierarchical structure, is opened.
Each time the switch is pushed to this
position, the page returns to one stage higher
in the hierarchy.
lCover
Open this cover to use the MENU ON/OFF
switch or the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch.
Right side (near the rear)
aBuilt-in speaker
The speaker can be used to monitor E-E 1) sound
during recording, and playback sound during
playback. The speaker also sounds alarms to
reinforce visual warnings (see page 176).
If you connect earphones to the EARPHONE
jack, the speaker output is suppressed
automatically.
1) E-E: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric”. In E-E
mode, video and audio signals input to the camcorder
are output after passing through internal electric
circuits only. This can be used to check input signals.
bLCD monitor
Displays remaining battery capacity, remaining
media capacity, audio levels, time data, and so on
(see page 26).
Also allows you to check camera and playback
pictures.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 21
Chapter 1 Overview
You can adjust the position and angle of the LCD
monitor.
cWARNING indicator
Lights up or flashes when an abnormality occurs
(see page 176).
dACCESS lamp
Lights up in blue when data is written to or read
from the recording media.
eProtection cover of the audio control
section
Open to access the audio control section (see
page 22).
fProtection cover of the thumbnail
screen operations section
Open to access the thumbnail screen operations
section (see page 22).
gF REV (fast reverse) button and
indicator
This plays back at high speed in the reverse
direction. The playback speed changes in the
order ×4 t ×15 t ×24 with each press of the
button. The indicator lights during high-speed
playback in the reverse direction.
hPLAY/PAUSE button and indicator
Press this button to view play back video images
using the viewfinder screen or the LCD monitor.
The indicator lights during playback.
Press this button again during playback to pause,
outputting a still image. At this time the indicator
flashes at a rate of once per second.
Pressing the F REV or F FWD button during
playback or pause starts high speed playback in
the forward or reverse direction.
iF FWD (fast forward) button and
indicator
This plays back at high speed in the forward
direction. The playback speed changes in the
order ×4 t ×15 t ×24 with each press of the
button. The indicator lights during high-speed
playback in the forward direction.
jPREV button
This jumps to the first frame of the current clip.
If you press this together with the F REV button,
the jump is to the first frame of the first recorded
clip on the recording media.
If you press this button twice in rapid succession,
the jump is to the first frame of the last preceding
clip (or the first frame of the current clip when no
preceding clips exist).
kSTOP button
Press this button to stop playback.
lNEXT button
This jumps to the first frame of the next clip.
If you press this together with the F FWD button,
the jump is to the first frame of the last recorded
clip on the recording media.
mDISP SEL (display selection)/EXPAND
(expand function) button
With each press of this button, the display in the
LCD monitor changes as follows.
If you press this button when the thumbnail
screen is displayed, the duration of the selected
clip is divided into fractions, and the first frame of
each of the divisions is shown in a further
thumbnail display (expand function). For an HD
recorded MP4 clip, its duration is divided into 12.
If an SD recorded AVI clip comprises multiple
files, the divisions are displayed for the individual
files.
Display indication Meaning
Video with
superimposed
information (CHAR)
The LCD monitor displays
the same text information as
the viewfinder.
Video without
superimposed
information (MONI)
The video only appears.
Status display
(STATUS)
Counter indications,
warnings, audio levels, and
similar information appear.
No video image appears.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
22
Chapter 1 Overview
For MP4 clips, each time you press this button the
division is repeated. Hold down the SHIFT button
and press this button to step back through the
division process.
nHOLD (display hold) button
Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data
displayed in the LCD monitor. (The timecode
generator continues running.) Pressing this button
again releases the hold.
For details of the counter display, see page 27.
oRESET/RETURN button
Resets the value shown in the time counter
display in the LCD monitor. According to the
settings of the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch
(see page 23) and the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN
switch (see page 23), this button resets the
display as follows.
a) Of the timecode bits for every frame recorded on the
media, those bits which can be used to record useful
information for the user such as scene number,
shooting place, etc.
For details, see “Setting the Time Data” (page 62).
This button returns to the previous screen when
pressed during thumbnail screen display, expand
thumbnail screen display, or essence mark
thumbnail screen display.
pDISPLAY switch
This cycles the data displayed in the time counter
display in the LCD monitor through the sequence
COUNTER, TC, and U-BIT (see page 27).
COUNTER: Display the elapsed recording/
playback time (hours, minutes, seconds,
frames).
TC: Display timecode.
U-BIT: Display user bits data.
qBRIGHT (brightness) button
Switches the brightness of the LCD monitor
backlight.
Each press of the button selects the next setting in
the order shown in the following table.
If you press the button with the LCD monitor off,
the LCD backlight comes on in the H state.
Thumbnail screen operations section and audio
control section
aTHUMBNAIL indicator
This lights when thumbnail screen is displayed.
bTHUMBNAIL button
Press this button to display the thumbnail screen
(see page 91) and to carry out a thumbnail
operation.
Press once more to return to the original display.
cSET (set) button and arrow buttons
Use these buttons to make timecode and user bit
settings, and for thumbnail screen operations (see
page 98).
When the menu is displayed, press this button to
select an item or to confirm the setting change.
dMENU button
Each press of this button turns the setup menu
display on and off.
The function of this button is the same as that of
the MENU ON/OFF switch.
Settings of switches To reset
DISPLAY switch: COUNTER Counter to
0:00:00:00
DISPLAY switch: TC
PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK
switch: PRESET
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch:
SET
Timecode to
00:00:00:00
DISPLAY switch: U-BIT
PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK
switch: PRESET
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch:
SET
User bits data a) to
00 00 00 00
Setting LCD monitor backlight
H High (select this to view the LCD
monitor outdoors in the daytime)
M Brightness between H and L
L Low (select this to view the LCD monitor
indoors or outdoors at night)
OFF Off (the display is also off)
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 23
Chapter 1 Overview
eF-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/
recording run) switch
Selects the operating mode of the internal
timecode generator. The operating mode is set as
explained below, depending on the position of the
switch.
F-RUN: Timecode keeps advancing, regardless
of whether the camcorder is recording. Use
this setting when synchronizing the timecode
with external timecode.
SET: Sets the timecode or user bits.
R-RUN: Timecode advances only during
recording. Use this setting to have a
consecutive timecode on the recording
media.
For details, see “Setting the Timecode” (page 62)
and “Setting the User Bits” (page 63).
fLEVEL CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (audio
channel 1/2/3/4 recording level) knobs
Adjust the audio levels to be recorded on channels
1, 2, 3, and 4 when the AUDIO SELECT CH1/
CH2 and AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 switches are
set to MANUAL.
gAUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 (audio
channel 3/4 adjustment method
selection) switch
Select the audio level adjustment method for each
of audio channels 3 and 4.
AUTO: Automatic adjustment
MANUAL: Manual adjustment
hESSENCE MARK button
By pressing this button when a thumbnail display
is on the screen, you can view the following
thumbnail displays of the essence-marked frames
of the selected clip, depending on the item
selected in a list displayed on the screen.
All: Thumbnail display of all frames marked with
essence marks.
Rec Start (in UDF mode): Thumbnail display of
frames marked with Rec Start marks and of
the first frames of clips (when the first frames
are not marked with Rec Start marks).
Shot Mark1: Thumbnail display of the frames
marked with Shot Mark 1
Shot Mark2: Thumbnail display of the frames
marked with Shot Mark 2
You can also select Shot Mark 0 and Shot Mark 3
to Shot Mark 9.
If you have recorded clips by using planning
metadata that defined names for Shot Mark 0 to
Shot Mark 9, the defined names are displayed
instead of the above item names in the list.
iSHIFT button
Use this in combination with other buttons.
jPRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/
CLOCK switch
Selects the type of timecode to record.
PRESET: Record new timecode on the media.
REGEN: Record timecode continuous with the
existing timecode recorded on the media.
Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/
R-RUN switch, the camcorder operates in R-
RUN mode.
CLOCK: Record timecode synchronized to the
internal clock. Regardless of the setting of
the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the
camcorder operates in F-RUN mode.
kAUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 (audio
channel 1/2 adjustment method
selection) switches
Select the audio level adjustment method for each
of audio channels 1 and 2.
AUTO: Automatic adjustment
MANUAL: Manual adjustment
lAUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (audio
channel 1/2/3/4 input selection) switches
Select the audio input signals to be recorded on
audio channels 1, 2, 3 and 4.
FRONT: Audio input signals from the
microphone connected to the MIC IN
connector
REAR: Audio input signals from an audio device
connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
connectors
WIRELESS: Audio input signals from the UHF
portable tuner if it is installed
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
24
Chapter 1 Overview
Left side and upper section
aASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches
You can assign the desired functions to these
switches on OPERATION >Assignable SW in
the setup menu (see page 156).
Off is assigned to these switches when the
camcorder is shipped from the factory.
bPC connector
Used to put this camcorder into USB connection
mode and use it as an external storage device for
a computer. When a computer without
ExpressCard slot is connected to this connector,
every memory card inserted in the camcorder is
recognized as a drive for that computer.
cExternal device connector
Connect an optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adapter
or a USB flash drive.
When a CBK-WA01 is connected: Wireless
LAN connection is available.
When a USB flash drive is connected:
Recording, saving and loading the following
data are available.
• Recording of proxy data (see page 85)
• Loading of planning metadata (see
page 87)
• Save and load setting data (see page 160)
Notes
• When you connect a CBK-WA01, install the optional
CBK-UPG01 Hardware Upgrade Key.
• Use this connector only for connecting a CBK-WA01
or a USB flash drive. Do not connect and use a USB
hub or similar products.
For details on how to use the CBK-WA01, refer to the
Supplement supplied in the CD-ROM (labeled
“Manuals for Solid-State Memory Camcorder”).
dSxS memory card slots
These two slots (A and B) can receive SxS
memory cards or other recording media (see
page 69).
eACCESS lamps
Indicate the state of slots A and B (see page 69).
You can check whether the lamps are lit even
when the slot cover is closed.
fEJECT buttons
To remove the recording media from the slot,
press the EJECT button to release the lock, then
press the button once more. This makes the media
come out of the slot partially (see page 70).
gSlot cover
Slide to the left and right to open and close.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 25
Chapter 1 Overview
hSLOT SELECT (SxS memory card
select) button
When SxS memory cards are loaded in both card
slots A and B, press this button to select the card
you want to use (see page 70).
iSDI IN (OPTION) (SDI input
(optional)) connector (BNC type)
When the optional CBK-HD02 SDI/
COMPOSITE Input and 50 Pin Interface is
installed, the camcorder can record HDSDI or
SDSDI signals input to this connector.
jGENLOCK IN (genlock signal input)
connector (BNC type)
This connector inputs a reference signal when the
camcorder is to be genlocked or when timecode is
to be synchronized with external equipment.
Available reference signals vary depending on the
current system frequency as shown in the
following table.
(Genlock for the camera module supports
horizontal sync signals only.) Use
MAINTENANCE >GENLOCK in the setup
menu to adjust the genlock H-phase (phase of
horizontal sync signal).
When the optional CBK-HD02 SDI/
COMPOSITE Input and 50 Pin Interface is
installed, the camcorder can record analog
composite video signals input to this connector.
kTC IN (timecode input) connector
(BNC type)
To apply an external lock to the timecode of the
camcorder, input the reference timecode.
For details, see “Setting the Timecode” (page 62).
lVIDEO OUT connector (BNC type)
Outputs video signals for monitoring. The output
signals can be selected either composite video or
HD-Y depending on the setting of OPERATION
>Input/Output >Output&i.LINK in the setup
menu.
mTC OUT (timecode output) connector
(BNC type)
To lock the timecode of an external VTR to the
timecode of this camcorder, connect this
connector to the external VTR’s timecode input
connector.
Rear
System frequency Available reference signals
1080/59.94i 1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
1080/29.97P 1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
1080/23.98P (PsF
output)
1080/23.98PsF, 480/59.94i
1080/23.98P
(Pulldown output)
1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
720/59.94P 1080/59.94i, 720/59.94P,
480/59.94i
720/29.97P 1080/59.94i, 720/59.94P,
480/59.94i
720/23.98P 1080/59.94i, 720/59.94P,
480/59.94i
480/59.94i 1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
480/29.97P 1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
1080/50i 1080/50i, 576/50i
1080/25P 1080/50i, 576/50i
720/50P 1080/50i, 720/50P, 576/50i
720/25P 1080/50i, 720/50P, 576/50i
576/50i 1080/50i, 576/50i
576/25P 1080/50i, 576/50i
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
26
Chapter 1 Overview
aTALLY (back tally) indicators (red)
Light up during recording. They will not light if
the TALLY switch is set to OFF. These indicators
also flash to indicate warnings (see page 21). The
tally indicator on the front of the viewfinder and
the REC indication on the viewfinder screen light
or flash in the same manner.
For details, see “Operation Warnings” (page 176).
bTALLY switch
Set to ON to activate the TALLY indicator
function.
cEARPHONE jack (stereo, minijack)
You can monitor the E-E sound during recording
and playback sound during playback. When an
alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound
through the earphone. Plugging an earphone into
the jack automatically cuts off the built-in
speaker.
You can select monaural or stereo on
MAINTENANCE >Audio in the setup menu.
dAUDIO IN selectors
Select the audio source you connect to the
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors.
LINE: When connecting a stereo amplifier or
other external audio signal source
MIC: When connecting a microphone that does
not require 48 V power supply
+48V: When connecting a microphone that
requires 48 V power supply
eHD/SD SDI OUT connector (BNC type)
Outputs an HDSDI or SDSDI signal (with
embedded audio). The output from this connector
can be turned on or off by OPERATION >Input/
Output >SDI Output in the setup menu.
fAUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 (audio channel
1 and channel 2 input) connectors (XLR
type, 3-pin, female)
These are audio input connectors for channels 1
and 2 to which you can connect audio equipment
or a microphone.
gBottom cover
This is provided for protecting the cables
connected to the connectors on the rear panel.
By loosening the screws which retain the cover to
the bottom of the camcorder, you can adjust the
position of the cover depending on the size and
shape of the microphone or audio cable plugs.
After adjusting the position, tighten the screws to
secure the cover.
hAUDIO OUT connector (XLR type, 5-
pin, male)
Outputs the audio signals recorded on audio
channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4. The
audio signals are selected by the MONITOR
switch.
iREMOTE connector (8-pin)
Connect a remote control unit, which makes it
possible to control the camcorder remotely.
Note
Before connecting/disconnecting the Remote Control
Unit to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn off the
camcorder POWER switch.
ji.LINK (HDV/DV) connector (6-pin,
IEEE1394 compliant, S400)
When the recording mode is FAT, to input and
output HDV/DV streams, connect to an HDV/DV
device.
aResolution
Indicates the resolution of HD output video.
FAT
LCD Monitor
Indication Resolution (horizontal × vertical)
1080 1080 lines (1920 × 1080)
720 720 lines (1280 × 720)
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 27
Chapter 1 Overview
bRecording format
Indicates the current recording format or the
recording format of clip being currently played.
•UDF mode
HD422 50
HD420 HQ
IMX50
DVCAM
• FAT mode
HQ1920
HQ1440
HQ1280
SP1440
DVCAM
cRecording mode
UDF: UDF mode
FAT: FAT mode
dFile format
MXF: When the recording mode is UDF
MP4: When the recording mode is FAT-HD
mode
DV-AVI: When the recording mode is FAT-SD
mode
eSystem frequency
Indicates the system frequency of video being
currently played or recorded.
59.94i
29.97P
23.98P
50i
25P
59.94P
50P
fStatus display
PB: Appears during play.
NDF: Appears when non-drop-frame timecode is
selected.
EXT-LK: Appears when the internal timecode
generator is locked to an external signal input
to the TC IN (timecode input) connector.
HOLD: Appears when the operation mode of the
internal timecode generator is set to R-RUN
and stopped.
gAudio format
Indicates the audio recording format or the audio
format of clip being currently played.
hAudio level indicators
Indicate the audio recording or play levels of
channels 1 to 4.
iTime counter display
Switches displays of time counter values,
timecode, and user bits data, depending on the
position of the DISPLAY switch.
Displays the type of data currently shown in the
time counter, as follows.
TCG: Recorded timecode
TCR: Playback timecode
UBG: Recorded user bits
UBR: Playback user bits
CNT: Counter
CLK: Time display (when the PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch is set to CLOCK)
When the HOLD button is pressed to hold the
timecode value, the timecode is displayed in the
format shown below. When the HOLD button is
pressed again to release the hold, the timecode is
displayed in the normal format.
jWarning indicator area
Displays warnings when trouble with recording
or moisture condensation occurs.
For details, see “Operation Warnings” on page 176.
You can also display the name of the next clip to
be recorded (see page 127).
kRemaining media capacity indicator
Shows bar segments indicating the remaining
capacity of recording media in the slots.
Indication Status
Recording
mode
Recording format
16bit FAT Any format
UDF • HD420 HQ
•DVCAM
• IMX (Audio Length is
set to16 bit)
24bit UDF • HD422 50
• IMX (Audio Length is
set to24 bit)
The three dots indicates that timecode is
displayed in the hold mode.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
28
Chapter 1 Overview
lRemaining battery capacity indicator
Shows bar segments indicating the remaining
battery capacity.
aPlug
Connect to the VF connector (20-pin) on the
camcorder.
bStopper
Prevents the viewfinder from coming off the
camcorder when it is slid from side to side.
cCamera operator tally indicator
Lights up while camcorder is recording. This
indicator can be covered when not in use.
This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings, in
the same manner as the tally indicator and the
recording/red tally indicators in the viewfinder.
dEyecup
eIndicators and status display
For details, see “Status Display on the Viewfinder
Screen” on page 30.
fDiopter adjustment ring
Allows for optimal focus adjustment.
gTally indicator
Lights up while camcorder is recording. Set the
TALLY switch to OFF when not in use. The
brightness can also be adjusted with the TALLY
switch.
This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings, in
the same manner as the camera operator tally
indicator and the recording/red tally indicators in
the viewfinder.
hPEAKING control
Turning this control clockwise adjusts the picture
sharpness, and makes focusing easier. This
control has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.
iCONTRAST control
Adjusts the contrast of the screen. This control
has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.
jBRIGHT control
Adjusts the brightness of the screen. This control
has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.
kTALLY switch
Controls the tally indicator located on the front of
the viewfinder.
HIGH: The tally indicator brightness is set to
high.
OFF: The tally indicator is disabled.
LOW: The tally indicator brightness is set to low.
lZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch
Controls the zebra pattern display on the
viewfinder screen as follows.
ON: A zebra pattern appears and stays.
OFF: The zebra pattern disappears.
MOMENT: A zebra pattern appears and stays for
about five seconds.
mDISPLAY/ASPECT switch
Turns the marker indication on and off, and
switches between 4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratios for
viewfinder screen display.
DISPLAY: When the marker indication is
enabled with the camcorder, the marker
indication on the viewfinder screen turns on
and off every time you push the switch up to
this position.
ASPECT: Each push of the switch down to this
position toggles the mask display on and off.
HDVF-20A Viewfinder (Optional)
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 29
Chapter 1 Overview
(Make mask display settings using
OPERATION >Marker >Aspect Mask in the
setup menu (see page 119).)
nViewfinder cable
oMicrophone holder
aPlug
Connect to the VF connector (26-pin) on the
camcorder.
bStopper
Prevents the viewfinder from coming off the
camcorder when it is slid from side to side.
cEyecup
dDiopter adjustment ring
Allows for optimal focus adjustment.
eEyepiece
You can raise this up when required by the
situation.
fViewfinder barrel
You can raise this up or rotate when required by
the situation.
gTally indicator
Lights up when recording is started by a press of
the REC START button on this camcorder, the
VTR button on the lens, or the VTR button on the
remote control unit.
When an abnormality occurs, the tally indicator
flashes to indicate a warning.
hPEAKING control
Turning this control clockwise adjusts the picture
sharpness, and makes focusing easier. This
control has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.
iCONTRAST control
Adjusts the contrast of the screen. This control
has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.
jBRIGHT control
Adjusts the brightness of the screen. This control
has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.
kTALLY switch
Controls the tally indicator located on the front of
the viewfinder.
HIGH: The tally indicator brightness is set to
high.
OFF: The tally indicator is disabled.
LOW: The tally indicator brightness is set to low.
lZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch
Controls the zebra pattern display on the
viewfinder screen as follows.
ON: Display a zebra pattern.
OFF: Do not display a zebra pattern.
mDISPLAY switch
Turns the display of text information on and off.
ON: Display text information.
OFF: Do not display text information.
nMIRROR switch
The image display on the monitor screen becomes
reversed horizontally or vertically when the
viewfinder barrel is raised up or rotated. Use this
switch to control the image display in such
situation.
CBK-VF01 Viewfinder (Optional)
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
30
Chapter 1 Overview
L/R: Reverse the image horizontally.
OFF: Do not reverse the image.
B/T: Reverse the image vertically.
oViewfinder cable
pMicrophone holder
Indicators (HDVF-20A)
The following indicators are arranged above and
below the screen of the HDVF-20A to show the
current state and adjustments of the camcorder.
aGreen tally indicator
Lights when the camcorder is the following
states.
• Picture Cache mode enabled
• Green tally signal received (when a camera
adaptor is mounted on the camcorder and a
camera extension unit is connected)
• Recording with MAINTENANCE >Camera
Config >HD/SDI Remote I/F in the setup menu
set to [G-Tally]
Flashes when the camcorder is the following
states.
• Set to Interval Rec mode or the consecutive
mode of Frame Rec mode (1 flash per second)
• Recording in Interval Rec mode or recording in
the consecutive mode of Frame Rec mode (4
flashes per second)
• Set to the single-shot mode of Frame Rec mode,
or recording in that mode (2 flashes per second)
bBATT (battery) indicator
This indicator starts flashing when the battery
connected to the camcorder is nearly exhausted,
and stays lit when the battery is completely
exhausted.
To prevent interruption during operation, replace
the battery as soon as this indicator starts flashing.
The battery power level at which the indicator starts
flashing can be set by MAINTENANCE >Battery in
the setup menu. For details, see page 135.
cRecording/red tally indicators
Light when the camcorder is the following states.
• Recording with the MAINTENANCE >Camera
Config >HD/SDI Remote I/F menu item set to
[R-Tally]
• Green tally signal or call signal received (when
a camera adaptor is mounted on the camcorder
and a camera extension unit is connected)
These indicators also flash to indicate warnings,
in the same manner as the tally indicator and the
camera operator tally indicator.
dViewfinder screen
See “Viewfinder screen display” (page 30).
eVTR SAVE indicator
Do not function on this camcorder.
f! (warning) indicator
This indicator lights when any of the following
conditions occurs with the corresponding item set
to [On] by OPERATION >“!” LED in the setup
menu.
• The gain is set to other than 0 dB.
• The SHUTTER selector is set to ON.
• The WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST.
• ATW is enabled.
• The lens extender is used.
• The reference value of auto iris adjustment is
not the standard value.
• The FILTER selector is set to other than 1.
Viewfinder screen display
The viewfinder screen displays not only the video
picture but also characters and messages
indicating the camcorder settings and operating
status, a center marker, a safety zone marker, etc.
When the menu screen is not displayed and the
DISPLAY switch is set to ON, the items for
which an ON setting was made with
Status Display on the Viewfinder
Screen
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 31
Chapter 1 Overview
OPERATION >Super Impose in the setup menu
or with related switches are displayed at the top
and bottom of the screen.
Caution messages are indicated for three seconds
when you carry out operations to change
camcorder settings. Adjustment execution
messages are indicated while adjustments
proceed. When adjustments are finished,
messages showing the results of adjustments
appear for three seconds.
Not only these indications are displayed on the
viewfinder screen, but a menu setting enables
them to be output as video signals.
All items that can be displayed on the viewfinder
screen are shown below.
Top of viewfinder screen
aExtender settings
Indicates the setting of the digital extender
function (when optional CBK-HD02 SDI/
COMPOSITE Input and 50 Pin Interface is
installed) of this camcorder and the setting of the
lens extender.
EX: The lens extender is on.
08: The lens shrinker is on.
x2D: The digital extender function of this
camcorder is on.
Ex2D: The lens extender and the digital extender
function of this camcorder are both on.
Digital extender function can be turned on or off
by an assignable switch to which Digital Extender
is assigned.
Note
When slow & Quick motion is selected or the freeze mix
function is used, the digital extender cannot be turned on.
When the camcorder is in focus magnification (Focus
Mag) mode, turning on the digital extender cancels the
mode.
bZoom position (when the lens is
mounted)
Indicates the zoom position of the zoom lens in
the range from 0 to 99.
cFocus position (when the serial lens is
mounted)
Indicates the focus position as distance to the
subject (in units of m).
dGreen tally
Lights when the camcorder is the following
states.
• MAINTENANCE >Camera Config >HD-SDI
Remote I/F is set to [G-Tally] in the setup menu
and a recording control signal is output from the
HD/SD SDI OUT connector.
• When the Picture Cache mode is enabled
• Green tally signal received (when a camera
adaptor is mounted on the camcorder and a
camera extension unit is connected)
eMedia status
Displays the name of the currently active media
slot (A or B).
fSpecial recording mode/operation
status
Indicates the current special recording mode/
operation status as follows.
Indication Meaning
zREC Recording in progress
STBY When recording is on a break in
Clip Continuous Rec mode or
standby in other modes
CONT Standby for next recording in Clip
Continuous Rec mode
zCACHE Standby in Picture Cache mode
zINT REC Recording in progress in Interval
Recording mode
zINT STBY Standby for next recording in
Interval Recording mode
INT STBY Standby in Interval Recording
mode
zFRM REC Recording in progress in Frame
Recording mode
zFRM
STBY
Standby for next recording in
Frame Recording mode
FRM STBY Standby in Frame Recording mode
zS&Q REC Recording in progress in Slow &
Quick Motion mode
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
32
Chapter 1 Overview
gWireless receiver reception level
When a wireless receiver is installed in the
camcorder, “W” appears together with four
segment reception level indicators for each of the
channels (1 to 4) that can be used by the receiver.
The indications are as follows.
In normal situation: The number of white
segments indicates the strength of the signal
level.
Muting (for an analog receiver) or error rate
aggravation (for a digital receiver): The
number of grey segments indicates the
strength of the signal level.
Reception level over peak: “P” is displayed
instead of the indicators. 1)
Tuner battery is low: The channel number and
indicator of the corresponding channel
flash. 1)
1) When an optional DWR-S01D is used
hBattery remaining/voltage capacity
The following is displayed depending on the type
of power source.
iExternal power input
Appears when power is supplied from an external
power source connected to the DC IN connector.
jColor temperature
Displays a color temperature calculated from the
gain of R and B, in the range 1.5 K to 50.0 K (in
steps of 0.1 K). The +/– signs may be displayed
depending on the Offset White setting (see
page 124).
No display: Offset White is OFF
+: The value of Offset White is greater than
3200K.
–: The value of Offset White is less than 3200K.
kNumber of system lines
Indicates the number of system lines (1080/720/
576/480/486 1)) of video currently being recorded
or played back.
1) In SD mode, when OPERATION >Format >Country
is set to other than [PAL Area] in the setup menu.
In UDF mode: 486
In FAT mode: 480
In UDF mode, the system frequency is also
displayed here.
lVideo format
Indicates the video format for recording (59.94i/
29.97P/23.98P/50i/25P/59.94P/50P) or the video
format of clip being currently played back (see
page 51).
The video aspect ratio (16:9 or 4:3) can also be
displayed when the recording format is set to
IMX50 or DVCAM.
mDepth of field indication (when the
serial lens is mounted and when the
CBK-VF01 is used)
Error/warning indication
A bar indicates the depth of field. The display unit
is meters or feet, as selected by OPERATION
>Display On/Off >Lens Info in the setup menu.
An error or warning message is displayed here
depending on the situation.
Under this area, you can also display the name of
the next clip to be recorded (see page 127).
nSpecial recording mode indication
The following is displayed when the camcorder is
in a special recording mode.
• Frame Rec (Frame Recording mode)
• Interval Rec (Interval Recording mode)
• S&Q Motion (Slow & Quick Motion mode)
oSpecial recording mode settings
indication
Appears when the camcorder is in a special
recording mode.
S&Q STBY Standby in Slow & Quick Motion
mode
CALL
(displayed in
red)
Being called from a connected
device
BREVIEW During recording review
Type of power
source
What is displayed
InfoLithium
battery
Remaining battery capacity icon
and remaining recording time
Anton Bauer
battery
Remaining battery capacity (%
indication)
Other type than
above
Input voltage
Indication Meaning
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 33
Chapter 1 Overview
Bottom of viewfinder screen
aTLCS iris control mode
The following icons are displayed to indicate the
video level control modes based on the Total
Level Control System (TLCS).
bFocus adjustment mode (when the auto
focus lens is mounted)
Indicates the current focus adjustment mode of
the camcorder.
• AF (Auto Focus mode)
• MF (Manual Focus mode)
• MF* (Manual Focus mode when the MF Assist
function is on)
• Full MF (Full Manual Focus mode)
cExternal device control
“REC2” is displayed when MAINTENANCE
>Camera Config >HD-SDI Remote I/F is set to
[Chara] in the setup menu and a recording control
signal is output from the HD/SD SDI OUT
connector.
dOperation status of connected i.LINK
device
The operating format (HDV or DV) and operation
status of that device are indicated as follows.
eVideo level indication
An indication is displayed together with an
appropriate ND filter position number when the
light level of the subject is too high or too low.
fTimecode
Caution message
Indicates the elapsed recording/playback time,
timecode, user bits data or other information
selected by the DISPLAY switch (see page 22).
Also indicates a caution message when caution is
required such as when you try to change settings.
gBrightness level (when the CBK-VF01
is used)
Indicates the average brightness level (%) of the
detection area.
hExternal input source
Indicates the type of external input signal (HDV)
to be recorded.
iRecording of external input
Indicates “EXT” when an external input is
recorded.
jElectric color temperature filter
Appears when the CC 5600K function is set to on.
kFilter position
Indicates the currently selected ND filter position
number. (see page 17).
When ELECTRICAL CC is assigned to an
assignable switch, the electrical filter position (A/
B/C/D) appears to the right of the ND filter
position (1 to 4), as shown on the previous page.
lWhite balance memory
Indicates the currently selected white balance
automatic adjustment memory.
AT W: ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) mode
W:A: Memory A mode
W:B: Memory B mode
W:P: Preset mode
3200: When the assignable switch to which Color
Temp SW 3200K has been assigned is on
4300: When the assignable switch to which Color
Temp SW 4300K has been assigned is on
Icon TLCS control mode
Backlight mode
Standard mode
Spotlight mode
Indication Meaning
zREC HDV recording in progress
STBY Standby for HDV recording
S
STD
zREC DV recording in progress
STBY Standby for DV recording
Indication Meaning
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
34
Chapter 1 Overview
5600: When the assignable switch to which Color
Temp SW 5600K has been assigned is on
6300: When the assignable switch to which Color
Temp SW 6300K has been assigned is on
mGain value
Indicates the gain value (in dB) of the video
amplifier, as set by the GAIN selector.
nShutter
Indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode.
For details, see “Setting the Electronic Shutter”
(page 57).
oAudio level meters
Indicate the audio levels of channel 1 and
channel 2.
pRemaining media capacity
The available time for recording with the current
video format (recording bit rate) is calculated
according to the remaining space of each media
and indicated in time units of minutes. A lock
icon appears if the media is write-protected.
qHistogram (when the CBK-VF01 is
used)
Shows a pixel distribution of video luminance (in
HD mode only).
rIris position (when the lens is mounted)
Indicates the iris position and the setting for iris
override (reference value for the lens iris) (see
page 59).
The iris override setting is indicated by four
segments indicator as follows.
Reference
value
Indicator
+0.25
x
Lower left segment is lit in grey.
+0.5 x
x
Left two segments are lit in grey.
+0.75 x
xx
Left two segments and lower
right segment are lit in grey.
+1 xx
xx
All segments are lit in grey.
–0.25
s
Lower left segment is lit in
white.
–0.5 s
s
Left two segments are lit in
white.
–0.75 s
ss
Left two segments and lower
right segment are lit in white.
–1 ss
ss
All segments are lit in white.
Reference
value
Indicator
Preparing a Power Supply 35
Chapter 2 Preparations
For safety, use only the Sony battery packs and
AC adaptors listed below.
• BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S Lithium-ion
Battery Pack
• AC power using the AC-DN2B/DN10 AC
Adaptor
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
When you dispose of the battery, you must obey the law
in the relative area or country.
ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie
du même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Lorsque vous mettez la batterie au rebut, vous devez
respecter la législation en vigueur dans le pays ou la
région où vous vous trouvez.
VORSICHT
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung falscher Batterien.
Batterien nur durch den vom Hersteller empfohlenen
oder einen gleichwertigen Typ ersetzen.
Wenn Sie die Batterie entsorgen, müssen Sie die Gesetze
der jeweiligen Region und des jeweiligen Landes
befolgen.
When a BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S Battery
Pack is used, the camcorder will operate
continuously for the time shown below.
WARNING
Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or the like.
AVERTISSEMENT
N’exposez pas les batteries à une chaleur excessive, au
soleil ou près d’un feu par exemple.
WARNUNG
Akkus dürfen keinesfalls übermäßiger
Wärmeeinwirkung ausgesetzt werden, wie z.B.
Sonneneinstrahlung, Feuer o. ä.
Note
The battery pack operating time depends on the
frequency of use of the battery pack, and the ambient
temperature when used.
Before use, charge the battery pack with a charger
suitable for each battery.
For details on the battery charging procedure, refer
to the battery charger operation manual.
Note on using the battery pack
A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully
recharged.
To attach the battery pack
1Press the battery pack against the back
of the camcorder, aligning the line on
the side of the battery pack with the
matching line on the camcorder.
Chapter2Preparations
Preparing a Power
Supply
Using a Battery Pack
Model name Operating time
BP-GL95 Approx. 180 minutes
BP-GL65 Approx. 120 minutes
BP-L60S Approx. 110 minutes
BP-L80S Approx. 145 minutes
Preparing a Power Supply
36
Chapter 2 Preparations
2Slide the battery pack down until its
“LOCK” arrow points at the matching
line on the camcorder.
Note
If the battery pack is not attached correctly, the terminal
may be damaged.
To detach the battery pack
Holding the release button in, pull the battery
pack up.
Notes
• During recording and playback (while the ACCESS
lamp on the right-side panel is lit in blue and the
ACCESS lamp in the card slot section is lit in orange),
be careful never to remove the battery pack.
• Make sure to power the camcorder off before replacing
the battery pack.
Mount an AC-DN2B/DN10 on the camcorder in
the same way as a battery pack, then connect to
the AC power supply.
The AC-DN2B/DN10 can supply up to 100 W of
power.
1BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S
2Align these lines.
1“LOCK” arrow
2Matching line on the camcorder
Using AC Power
Release button
To an AC outlet
Attaching the Viewfinder 37
Chapter 2 Preparations
CAUTION
When the viewfinder is attached, do not leave the
camcorder with the eyepiece facing the sun. Direct
sunlight can enter through the eyepiece, be focused in the
viewfinder and cause fire.
Note
The viewfinder is supplied separately.
The following procedure is an example for attaching the
HDVF-20A.
For procedures for attaching other viewfinders, refer
to a manual supplied with each viewfinder.
Note
When attaching the viewfinder, make notes of the
following points.
• Be sure to the power off the camcorder before coupling
the viewfinder connector to the camcorder’s VF
connector (20-pin). If you make this connection when
the camcorder power is on, the viewfinder may not
function properly.
• Couple the viewfinder connector firmly to the
camcorder’s VF connector. If the coupling is loose,
noise may appear on the video or the tally light may not
operate properly.
For more information about the connection of the
viewfinder and camcorder, contact a Sony service
representative.
11 Loosen the viewfinder left-to-right
positioning ring, 2 attach the
viewfinder to the viewfinder fitting
shoe, and 3 tighten the viewfinder left-
to-right positioning ring.
2Couple the viewfinder connector to the
VF connector (20-pin).
Detaching the viewfinder
You can carry out this by following the attaching
procedure in reverse order, but there is an
additional action to take: when detaching the
viewfinder from the fitting shoe, pull up the
stopper.
To adjust the viewfinder left-right position,
loosen the left-right positioning ring, and to adjust
the front-back position, loosen the front-to-back
positioning knob.
Attaching the Viewfinder
Attaching the Viewfinder
Adjusting the Viewfinder Position
Stopper
Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring
VF connector (20-pin)
Attaching the Viewfinder
38
Chapter 2 Preparations
By fitting an optional BKW-401 Viewfinder
Rotation Bracket, you can rotate the viewfinder
out of the way so that your right leg does not hit
the viewfinder while you are carrying the
camcorder.
1Loosen the front-to-back viewfinder
positioning levers and the front-to-back
viewfinder positioning knobs, and then
pull the viewfinder slide assembly
forward.
2Using a 2.5 mm diameter hexagonal
wrench, detach the viewfinder slide
assembly.
3Attach the BKW-401 with the supplied
bolts.
Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder
Rotation Bracket
Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob
Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring
Bolts with
hexagonal
hole
Viewfinder slide assembly
Bolts supplied with the BKW-401
Attaching the Viewfinder 39
Chapter 2 Preparations
4Adjust the front-to-back position so
that the arm of the BKW-401 does not
touch the handle when it is raised.
Removing the eyepiece gives a clearer view of the
screen from further away. It is also easy to
remove dust from the viewfinder screen and
mirror when the eyepiece is detached.
1Turn the eyepiece locking ring fully
counterclockwise, to align the red
marks on the locking ring and the
viewfinder barrel.
2Detach the eyepiece.
To reattaching the eyepiece
1Align the red marks on the eyepiece
locking ring and the viewfinder barrel.
2Align the red mark on the end of the
eyepiece end with the red marks on the
eyepiece locking ring and the
viewfinder barrel. Then insert the
eyepiece into the viewfinder barrel.
3Turn the eyepiece locking ring
clockwise until its “LOCK” arrow
points at the red mark on the viewfinder
barrel.
When the eyecup is worn out, replace it with a
new one.
For details of a replacement eyecup, contact a Sony
service representative.
To adjust the viewfinder focus
Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the
viewfinder image is sharpest.
To adjust the viewfinder screen
Adjust the brightness, contrast, and peaking of the
viewfinder screen with the controls shown below.
Detaching the Eyepiece
Adjust position so that arm
does not touch handle
1Locking ring
2Locking ring match mark
3Match mark on the viewfinder barrel
Match mark on end of eyepiece
Adjusting the Viewfinder Focus
and Screen
Diopter adjustment ring
Setting the Area of Use
40
Chapter 2 Preparations
When using the camcorder for the first
time
The area of use is not factory preset. Before using
the camcorder, you need to set this item. (You
cannot use the camcorder without setting this
item.)
To set the area of use
1Set the POWER switch to the ON
position.
The screen for setting the area of use appears
in the viewfinder.
1PEAKING control
2CONTRAST control
3BRIGHT control
Setting the Area of Use
MENU knob
POWER switch
Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock 41
Chapter 2 Preparations
2Press the MENU knob.
The settings for selectable areas of use are
displayed.
3Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired area of use.
a) The composite signal output from this camcorder
is an NTSC signal with a black setup (7.5 IRE).
The system frequency is 59.94i.
b) The composite signal output from this camcorder
is an NTSC signal with no black setup. The
system frequency is 59.94i.
c) The composite signal output from this camcorder
is a PAL signal. The system frequency is 50i.
4Set the following items.
• Time Zone
• Date/Time
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations”
(page 109).
5Turn the MENU knob to select
“Finish”, then press the MENU knob.
The camcorder is now ready for use.
You can set or change the date and time of the
internal clock. The date and time set are reflected
in the timecode.
For menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu
Operations” (page 109).
1Select MAINTENANCE >Clock Set
>Date/Time in the setup menu.
2Press the MENU knob.
The Date/Time setting window appears.
3Turn the MENU knob to display the
desired value, and press the knob.
The selection shifts to the next item on the
right.
4To continue the remaining settings,
repeat step 3.
5Making sure that “SET” is selected,
press the MENU knob.
The internal clock is set with the date and
time set in steps 3 and 4.
To cancel the setting
Before executing step 5, push the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch up to the
CANCEL/PRST side.
Setting Area of use
NTSC Area NTSC area (for areas other
than Japan) a)
NTSC(J) Area NTSC area (Japan) b)
PAL Area PAL area c)
Setting the Date/Time of
the Internal Clock
Mounting and Adjusting the Lens
42
Chapter 2 Preparations
Note
Always power the camcorder off before mounting or
removing a lens.
For information about using the lens, refer to the
operation manual for the lens.
Note
The lens is supplied separately.
1Push the lens locking lever up and
remove the lens mount cap from the
lens mount.
2Align the center pin on the lens with the
center slot in the lens mount, and insert
the lens into the mount.
3Holding the lens in place, push the lens
locking lever down to lock the lens.
Caution
If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come off
while the camcorder is being used. This could cause
a serious accident. Make sure the lens is firmly
locked. It is recommended that the lens mount
securing rubber be put on the lens locking lever as
illustrated above.
4Connect the lens cable to the LENS
connector.
5Secure the lens cable with the cable
clamps.
If you have attached an aberration correction
lens
The aberration correction function is activated
automatically. Starting the camcorder with an
aberration correction lens may require more time
than normally because of data loading at start-up.
Contact a Sony service representative for
information about aberration correction lenses.
If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you
zoom from telephoto to wide angle, adjust the
flange focal length (the distance from the plane of
the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane).
Make this adjustment just one time after
mounting or changing the lens.
When carrying out the adjustment, use a flange
focal length adjustment chart as the subject.
Notes
• If you use a subject with insufficient contrast, or move
the camcorder or subject during adjustment, this will
cause an adjustment error.
• Place the subject (the flange focal length adjustment
chart) so that it appears at the center of the screen at the
telephoto end. Arrange so that no nearby object (no
object closer to the camera than the chart) enters the
screen at the wide-angle end.
Mounting and Adjusting
the Lens
Lens mount
securing rubber
Adjusting the Flange Focal Length
About 3 m (10 ft)
Preparing the Audio Input System 43
Chapter 2 Preparations
Carrying out the adjustment
1Set the iris to manual.
2Open the iris, position the supplied
flange focal length adjustment chart
approximately 3 meters (10 ft) away
from the camcorder, and arrange the
lighting to obtain a satisfactory video
output.
3Loosen the fixing screws on the F.f or
F.B ring (flange focal length adjustment
ring).
4Use manual or power zoom to set the
lens to telephoto.
5Point the camcorder at the chart by
turning the focus ring and focus on it.
6Set the zoom ring to wide angle.
7Turn the F.f or F.B ring until the chart
is in focus, being careful not to disturb
the focus ring.
8Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays
in focus all the way from wide angle to
telephoto.
9Tighten the F.f or F.B ring fixing
screws.
You can attach the optional ECM-680S stereo
microphone to the microphone holder of the
viewfinder (optional).
The following procedure is an example for
attaching a microphone holder to the HDVF-20A.
For procedures for attaching a microphone holder
to other viewfinders, refer to a manual supplied with
each viewfinder.
1Loosen the screw and open the
microphone holder clamp.
2Place the microphone in the
microphone holder.
1Wind the microphone spacer around
the microphone, while peeling off the
protective sheets on both sides of the
microphone spacer.
2Place the microphone in the holder so
that “UP” is at the top.
3Close the microphone holder.
4Tighten the screw.
Preparing the Audio
Input System
Connecting a Microphone to the
MIC IN Connector
Microphone holder clamp
Preparing the Audio Input System
44
Chapter 2 Preparations
On how to perform this operation, refer to the
operation manual for the microphone.
3Plug the microphone cable into the MIC
IN connector, then set the AUDIO IN
switch for the channel on which you
want to record the audio from this
microphone to FRONT.
4Secure the microphone cable with the
cable clamp.
You can connect up to two monaural
microphones to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
connectors, using an optional CAC-12
Microphone Holder.
The following is the procedure for attaching an
electret condenser microphone such as the ECM-
674/678.
On how to attach the CAC-12, refer to the operation
manual for the CAC-12.
1Attach the electret condenser
microphone.
1Loosen the ball joint lock lever.
2Wind the microphone spacer (sheet
type, supplied with the microphone)
around the microphone, while peeling
off the protective sheets on both sides
of the microphone spacer.
3Place the microphone in the holder so
that “UP” is at the top.
4Close the microphone holder.
5Tighten the screw.
6Position so that the microphone does
not interfere with the viewfinder and
tighten the ball joint lock lever.
Connecting Microphones to the
AUDIO IN Connectors
Microphone
Preparing the Audio Input System 45
Chapter 2 Preparations
2Connect the microphone cable to the
AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector.
3Set the switches as follows.
• Set the AUDIO IN selectors indicated
below, depending on the power supply type
of the microphone.
Internal power supply: MIC
External power supply: +48V
• Set the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 switch for the
channel to which the microphone is
connected to REAR.
4Switch the input level to match the
sensitivity of the microphone used.
Switch the input level by changing the setting of
MAINTENANCE >Audio >Rear MIC CH1/
CH2 Ref in the setup menu (factory default
setting is –60 dB). For details, see page 137.
Notes
• If the input level on the camcorder is not at an
appropriate setting for the microphone sensitivity, loud
sounds may be distorted, and the signal-to-noise ratio
may be affected.
• In order for the AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 connectors
on the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V
power supply, female XLR connectors (3-pin) are
fitted. If the microphone cable has a female connector,
use an adaptor.
• When you detach a CAC-12 Microphone Holder once
you have attached to the camcorder, be careful not to
lose the two screws fixing the CAC-12 (in step 1).
After detaching the CAC-12, be sure to put the two
screws back into their original places.
To use a Sony UHF wireless microphone system,
power the camcorder off and then fit one of the
following UHF portable tuners.
• DWR-S01D Digital Wireless Receiver
• WRR-855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
• WRR-860A/861/862 UHF Synthesized
Diversity Tuner
For details of these units, refer to the operation
manuals for them.
Note
The optional WRR Mount Bracket (service part number:
A-8278-057-B) is required to fit the WRR-862.
For details, contact your vendor or a Sony service
representative
To fit the DWR-S01D or WRR-855S
1Remove the four fixing screws holding
the cover of the portable tuner/receiver
housing slot located in the rear of the
camcorder, to remove the cover.
1AUDIO IN selectors
2Monaural microphone
3AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 switches
4To AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector
Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner
(for a UHF Wireless Microphone
System)
Preparing the Audio Input System
46
Chapter 2 Preparations
2Insert the DWR-S01D or WRR-855S
into the housing slot, and fasten the four
fixing screws.
3Set the AUDIO IN selector for the
channel to which you want to input
audio signal to WIRELESS (see
page 23).
To fit the WRR-862 (when using a BP-
GL65/GL95/L60S/L80S Battery Pack)
1Attach the WRR tuner fitting (not
supplied; service part number: A-8278-
057-B) to the back of the camcorder.
1Use a Phillips type screwdriver to
tighten the four screws placed in the
tuner fitting. For three of these screws,
insert the screwdriver through the
corresponding hole and tighten the
screw.
Note
Make sure that all four screws are fully tightened.
2Loosen the adjustment screws on the
tuner fitting.
3Adjust the tuner fitting position for a
BP-GL65/GL95/L60S/L80S Battery
Pack to be attached, and tighten the
adjustment screws to fix its position.
4Attach the mount plate supplied with
the WRR-862.
About the WRR tuner fitting (service part
number: A-8278-057-B), contact a Sony service
or sales representative.
2Attach the battery pack.
On how to attach the battery pack, see “To
attach the battery pack” on page 35.
3Mount the tuner on the WRR tuner
fitting.
4Connect the tuner power cord to the DC
OUT connector of the camcorder, and
the audio output cable to the AUDIO IN
CH-1 or CH-2 connector.
5Set the switches as follows.
• Set the AUDIO IN selector for the channel
to which the audio output cable is attached
to MIC.
• Set the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4
switch for the channel to which the audio
output cable is connected to REAR.
If the XLR connection automatic detection
function is on, the input signal for audio
recording is selected automatically, and
therefore this setting is not required.
DWR-S01D or WRR-855S
BP-GL65/GL95/L60S/L80S
Adjustment
screws
Mount plate
(supplied with
WRR-862)
Phillips type
screwdriver
WRR-862
Preparing the Audio Input System 47
Chapter 2 Preparations
Connect the audio output connector of the audio
equipment that supplies the line input signal to the
AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector.
Switch settings
Set the AUDIO IN selector for the channel to
which the audio signal source is connected to
LINE.
Selecting the audio inputs to be recorded
• With the XLR connection automatic detection
function being off (the factory default setting):
A signal must be selected for audio recording by
setting the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 switch to
REAR depending on which of the AUDIO IN
CH-1 and CH-2 connectors is used for
connecting the external audio equipment.
• With the XLR connection automatic detection
function being on: When a cable is connected to
the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector, the
input from that connector is automatically
selected for audio recording, regardless of the
setting of the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 switch.
The XLR connection automatic detection
function can be switched on or off by
MAINTENANCE >Audio >Rear XLR Auto in
the setup menu.
Connecting Line Input Audio
Equipment
1AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 switches
2To DC OUT connector
3To AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector
4AUDIO IN selectors
1AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 switches
2To AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector
3Audio equipment
4AUDIO IN selectors
Tripod Mounting
48
Chapter 2 Preparations
1Attach the optional VCT-14/U14
Tripod Adaptor to the tripod.
2Mount the camcorder on the tripod
adaptor.
To remove the camcorder from the tripod
adaptor
Hold down the red button and pull the lever in the
direction of the arrow.
Note
The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged
position even after the camcorder is removed. If this
happens, press the red button and move the lever as
shown above until the pin returns to the stowed position.
If the pin remains in the engaged position, you will not
be able to mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor.
Tripod Mounting
Tripod adaptor
Camera mount
Slide the camcorder forward along the
groove in the adaptor until it clicks.
Red button
Lever
Connecting a Video Light / Using the Shoulder Strap 49
Chapter 2 Preparations
With this camcorder, you can use the Anton
Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent video light
(powered by 12 V with maximum power
consumption of 50 W).
• If you connect the video light to the LIGHT
connector on the camcorder and set the LIGHT
switch to AUTO, you can turn the light on and
off automatically as you start and stop recording
on this camcorder.
• The output of the LIGHT connector on the
camcorder is controlled to 12 V even when the
camcorder is supplied with over 12 V power
(through the DC IN connector or battery pack).
The brightness or color temperature of the light
will not change according to voltage increase.
Notes
• Do not use a video light with power consumption of
over 50 W.
• The brightness or color temperature of the light will
change when the voltage (supplied through the DC IN
connector or from the battery pack) is under 12 V.
To attach the video light
Fit the video light to the accessory fitting shoe on
the camcorder grip, and connect the video light
cable to the LIGHT connector.
Note
The accessory fitting shoe on the camcorder is of the
1/4-inch tapped hole type. If you want to replace this with
a slide-type shoe, use the supplied cold shoe kit. On how
to fit the cold shoe kit, refer to “Using a External Hard
Disk” in the Supplement supplied in the CD-ROM
(labeled “Manuals for Solid-State Memory
Camcorder”).
To attach the shoulder strap
1Fit one of the clips to a shoulder strap
fitting.
2Fit the other clip to the shoulder strap
fitting on the other side of the grip in the
same way as in step 1.
Connecting a Video
Light
Using the Shoulder
Strap
Clip
Pull up the strap to lock the fitting.
Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position
50
Chapter 2 Preparations
To remove the shoulder strap
You can slide the shoulder pad back and forth
within a 40 mm range. This adjustment helps you
get the best balance for shooting with the
camcorder on your shoulder.
1Raise the lever in the center of the
shoulder pad to unlock the shoulder
pad.
2Slide the shoulder pad backward or
forward until it is in the most
convenient position.
3Bring down the lever to lock the
shoulder pad in the selected position.
Press here and pull in the direction
shown by the arrow to release.
Adjusting the Shoulder
Pad Position
Shoulder pad
Setting the Video Format 51
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
For menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 109).
The following recording formats can be selected for different combinations of video resolution and system
frequency.
In UDF mode
Chapter3Adjustments and Settings
Setting the Video Format
UDF
OPERATION >Format menu settings Video format (recording
format/system frequency)
Frame size
HD/SD HD System
Line
Rec Format System Frequency a)
HD 1080 HD422
50
59.94i HD422 1920/59.94i 1920×1080
50i HD422 1920/50i
29.97P HD422 1920/29.97P
25P HD422 1920/25P
23.98P HD422 1920/23.98P
HD420
HQ
59.94i HQ 1440/59.94i 1440×1080
50i HQ 1440/50i
29.97P HQ 1440/29.97P
25P HQ 1440/25P
23.98P HQ 1440/23.98P
720 HD422
50
59.94P HD422 1280/59.94P 1280×720
50P HD422 1280/50P
29.97P HD422 1280/29.97P
25P HD422 1280/25P
23.98P HD422 1280/23.98P
HD420
HQ
59.94P HQ 1280/59.94P
50P HQ 1280/50P
23.98P b) HQ 1280/23.98P
SD — IMX50 c) 59.94i IMX50/59.94i 720×486
50i IMX50/50i 720×576
29.97P d) IMX50/29.97P 720×486
25P d) IMX50/25P 720×576
DVCAM c) 59.94i DVCAM/59.94i 720×480
50i DVCAM/50i 720×576
29.97P d) DVCAM/29.97P 720×480
25P d) DVCAM/25P 720×576
Setting the Video Format
52
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
a) 59.94i/29.97P/59.94P/23.98P: When OPERATION >Format >Country in the setup menu is set to [NTSC Area] or
[NTSC(J) Area]
50i/25P/50P: When OPERATION >Format >Country in the setup menu is set to [PAL Area]
b) 59.94i after 2-3 pulldown is recorded
c) When the optional CBK-MD01 is installed
d) Converted to PsF and recorded
In FAT mode
a) 59.94i/29.97P/59.94P/23.98P: When OPERATION >Format >Country in the setup menu is set to [NTSC Area] or
[NTSC(J) Area]
50i/25P/50P: When OPERATION >Format >Country in the setup menu is set to [PAL Area]
b) 59.94i after 2-3 pulldown is recorded
c) When the optional CBK-MD01 is installed
d) Converted to PsF and recorded
FAT
OPERATION >Format menu settings Video format (recording
format/system frequency)
Frame size
HD/SD HD System
Line
Rec Format System Frequency a)
HD 1080 HQ 1920 59.94i HQ 1920/59.94i 1920×1080
50i HQ 1920/50i
29.97P HQ 1920/29.97P
25P HQ 1920/25P
23.98P HQ 1920/23.98P
HQ 1440 59.94i HQ 1440/59.94i 1440×1080
50i HQ 1440/50i
29.97P HQ 1440/29.97P
25P HQ 1440/25P
23.98P HQ 1440/23.98P
SP 1440 59.94i SP 1440/59.94i
50i SP 1440/50i
23.98P b) SP 1440/23.98P
720 HQ 1280 59.94P HQ 1280/59.94P 1280×720
50P HQ 1280/50P
29.97P HQ 1280/29.97P
25P HQ 1280/25P
23.98P HQ 1280/23.98P
SD — DVCAM c) 59.94i DVCAM/59.94i 720×480
50i DVCAM/50i 720×576
29.97P d) DVCAM/29.97P 720×480
25P d) DVCAM/25P 720×576
Setting the Video Format 53
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
Select the recording mode between UDF and
FAT.
1Select OPERATION >Format >File
System in the setup menu (see
page 112).
2Turn the MENU knob to select [UDF]
or [FAT], and press the knob.
A confirmation message appears.
3Select [Execute] to execute, or select
[Cancel] to cancel, and then press the
MENU knob.
4Power the camcorder off and on again.
Refer to the above table and change the settings of
the relevant items.
1Select OPERATION >Format in the
setup menu (see page 112).
2Turn the MENU knob to select the item
to change, and press the knob.
3Turn the MENU knob to change the
setting, and press the knob.
A confirmation message appears.
4Select [Execute] to execute, or select
[Cancel] to cancel, and then press the
MENU knob.
5When the setting of HD/SD or Country
was changed, power the camcorder off
and on again.
Selecting the Recording Mode
Changing the Video Format
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance
54
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
To ensure excellent image quality when using this
camcorder, conditions may require that both the
black balance and the white balance be adjusted.
Black balance and white balance adjustment
values that are automatically set by the camcorder
and the various settings are stored in the
camcorder memory and retained even when the
power is turned off.
Black balance adjustment
The black balance will require adjustment in the
following cases.
• When the camcorder is used for the first time
• When the camcorder has not been used for a
long time
• When the camcorder is used under conditions in
which the surrounding temperature has changed
greatly
• When the GAIN selector (L/M/H/Turbo) values
have been changed by using OPERATION
>Gain Switch in the setup menu.
It is not usually necessary to adjust the black
balance when using the camcorder after it has
been off.
White balance adjustment
Always readjust the white balance when the
lighting conditions change.
In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are
performed in the following order: black set and
black balance. Manual black balance adjustment
can be selected from the setup menu.
Automatic black balance adjustment is disabled
in the following case.
• During recording
• In a special recording modes (Picture Cache
Rec, Interval Rec, Frame Rec, Slow & Quick)
• When the shutter mode is SLS
1Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM.
2Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to
BLACK and release the switch.
The message “Executing...” appears during
execution, and changes to “Done” when the
adjustment finishes. Adjustment values are
saved to memory automatically.
Notes
• During the black balance adjustment, the iris is
automatically closed.
• During the black balance adjustment, the gain
selection circuit is automatically activated so you may
see flickering on the viewfinder screen, but this is not
a fault.
• Output from the i.LINK connector stops temporarily if
you execute black balance adjustment during i.LINK
output. Output from the connector resumes when black
balance adjustment finishes.
If automatic black balance adjustment
cannot be made
If the black balance adjustment cannot be
completed normally, an error message will appear
for about three seconds on the viewfinder screen.
Possible messages are listed below.
If any of the above error messages is displayed,
retry the black balance adjustment.
If the error message occurs again, an internal
check is necessary.
For information about this internal check, refer to
the Maintenance Manual.
Note
If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS
connector, it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris. If
this happens, the black balance will be incorrect.
Adjusting the Black
Balance and the White
Balance
Adjusting the Black Balance
Error message Meaning
NG: Iris Not
Closed
The lens iris did not close;
adjustment was impossible.
NG: Timeout Adjustment could not be
completed within the standard
number of attempts.
NG: Out of
Range
The difference between the
reference value and the current
value is so great that it exceeds
the range. Adjustment was
impossible.
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance 55
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
1Set the switches and selectors as shown
below.
• GAIN switch: L (set to a gain value that is
as small as possible)
• OUTPUT/DCC switch: CAM
• WHITE BAL switch: A or B 1)
1) Adjustment values are saved to memory B only
when OPERATION >White Setting >White
Switch<B> in the setup menu, is set to
[Memory].
2Set the FILTER selector to suit the
lighting conditions as follows.
3Place a white test card under the same
lighting conditions as for the subject to
be shot and zoom up to it.
Alternatively, any white object such as a
cloth or a wall can be used.
The absolute minimum white area is as
follows.
Note
Make sure there are not bright spots in the
rectangle.
4Adjust the lens iris.
Manually adjusted lens: set the iris to an
appropriate setting.
Lens with automatic iris: set the automatic/
manual switch on the lens to automatic.
5Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to
WHITE and then release the switch.
The message “Executing...” appears during
execution, and changes to “OK: (color
temperature of subject)” when the
adjustment finishes.
The adjustment values are saved
automatically in the memory selected in
step 1 (A or B).
Note
If the camcorder has a zoom lens with an automatic
iris, the iris may hunt 1) during the adjustment. To
prevent this, adjust the iris gain knob (indicated as
IG, IS, or S) on the lens.
For details, refer to the lens operation manual.
1) Hunting: Repeated brightening and darkening of
the image, resulting from repeated response to
automatic iris control.
If the automatic white balance adjustment
cannot be made
If the white balance adjustment cannot be
completed normally, an error message will appear
for about three seconds on the viewfinder screen.
Possible messages are listed below.
If any of the above error messages is displayed,
retry the white balance adjustment. If the error
message occurs again, an internal check is
necessary.
For information about this internal check, refer to
the Maintenance Manual.
If you have no time to adjust the white
balance
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.
This makes it possible to automatically set the
white balance to 5600K (factory default value) by
pressing the COLOR TEMP. button.
The color temperature to which the white balance
is set when the COLOR TEMP. button is pressed
can be selected from among 3200K, 4300K,
5600K, and 6300K on OPERATION
>Assignable SW in the setup menu. You can also
assign color temperatures to the ASSIGN. 1/3
switches or ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches.
Adjusting the White Balance
Rectangle centered on the screen. The
lengths of the sides are 70% of the length
and width of the screen.
Error message Meaning
NG: Low Light The white video level is too low.
Either open the lens iris or
increase the gain.
NG: Timeout Adjustment could not be
completed within the standard
number of attempts.
NG: High Light The white video level is too
high. Either stop down the lens
iris or change the ND filter.
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance
56
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
To change the color temperature when
the ND filter is switched
You can assign electrical CC (color correction)
filters to ND filters (see page 17). This allows you
to change the color temperature automatically
when the ND filter is switched.
1Set MAINTENANCE >White Filter
>ND Filter C.Temp in the setup menu
(see page 143) to On.
2To assign an electrical CC filter to
FILTER selector position number 1,
select [ND FLT C.Temp<1>]. To assign
it to positions 2 to 4, select [ND FLT
C.Temp<2-4>].
3Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired color temperature.
As you turn the MENU knob, the color
temperature changes as follows: 3200K y
4300K y 5600K y 6300K.
4Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required.
To switch between electrical CC filters
with an assignable switch
You can assign the function that switches
between electrical CC filters to an assignable
switch. This allows you to switch between color
temperatures (3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K) that
have been assigned to up to four positions (A to
D) with each press of the assignable switch.
Regardless of assignments to assignable
switches, you can also switch between the color
temperatures assigned to each position from a
RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit.
1Select MAINTENANCE >White Filter
in the setup menu (see page 143).
2Select the position to which to assign a
CC filter by selecting one of [Electrical
CC<A>] to [Electrical CC <D>], and
then turn the MENU knob to select the
desired color temperature.
As you turn the MENU knob, the color
temperature changes as follows: 3200K y
4300K y 5600K y 6300K.
To set no color temperature
Select “-----” with Electrical CC<C> or <D>
selected.
When the assignable switch is pressed, the
setting for that position is not displayed. For
example, if “-----” is set for one position, then
switching between the remaining three
positions is carried out.
3Repeat step 2 as required.
4Assign the electrical CC filter switching
function (ELECTRICAL CC) to an
assignable switch (see page 158).
White balance memory
Values stored in memory are held until the white
balance is next adjusted even when the camcorder
power is turned off.
The camcorder has two white balance memories,
A and B. You can automatically save adjustment
values for each ND filter in the memory that
corresponds to the WHITE BAL switch setting
(A or B). The camcorder has four built-in ND
filters, allowing you to save a total of eight
adjustment values (4 × 2). However, the contents
of the memories are not linked to ND filter
settings in the following cases.
• When the number of memories allocated to
each of A and B is limited to one by setting
OPERATION >White Setting >Filter White
Memory in the setup menu to Off.
• When the electrical CC filter switching function
has been assigned to an assignable switch, or
when a remote control unit has been connected.
(In these cases, the contents of white balance
memory are linked to electrical CC filter
positions (A to D).)
Also, when OPERATION >White Setting
>White Switch<B> in the setup menu is set to
[ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)], and the
WHITE BAL switch is set to B, the ATW
function is activated to automatically adjust the
white balance of the picture being shot for
varying lighting conditions.
Setting the Electronic Shutter 57
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
The shutter modes that can be used with the
electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that can
be selected are listed below.
Standard mode
Select this mode for shooting fast-moving
subjects with little blurring.
You can set the shutter speed in one of two shutter
modes: Speed mode, in which the speed is set in
seconds, and Angle mode, in which the speed is
set in degrees.
Speed mode
a) This speed cannot be selected when the camcorder is
in Slow & Quick Motion mode and OPERATION
>Rec Function >Frame Rate in the setup menu is set
to a value that is greater than the system frequency.
Angle mode
180°, 90°, 45°, 22.5°, and 11.25°
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode
Select this mode for obtaining images with no
horizontal bands of noise when shooting subjects
such as monitor screens.
As shown in the following tables, the range of
shutter speeds that can be set varies depending on
whether the Slow & Quick Motion (S&Q)
function is on or off.
System lines: 1080
System lines: 720
SLS (slow speed shutter) mode
Select this mode for shooting subjects in low level
lighting conditions.
Notes
• SLS mode cannot be used when the video format is SP
1440/23.98P or when the camcorder is in Slow &
Quick Motion mode.
• It is not possible to use SLS mode when OPERATION
>Input/Output >i.Link I/O is set to [Enable] in the
setup menu.
• It is not possible to output the color bar signal, turn the
SLS mode on or off, or change the number of
accumulated frames when the number of accumulated
frames is set to 16.
Notes
• When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens wider as
the shutter speed increases, thus reducing the depth of
field.
• The selectable shutter speeds vary depending on the
current system frequency.
Setting the Electronic
Shutter
Shutter Modes
System
frequency
Shutter speed (unit: seconds)
59.94i
59.94P
50i
50P
1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,
1/1000, 1/2000
29.97P 1/40 a), 1/50 a), 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125,
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000
25P 1/33 a), 1/50 a), 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125,
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000
23.98P 1/32 a), 1/48 a), 1/50 a), 1/60, 1/96, 1/100,
1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000
System
frequency
Shutter speed (unit: Hz)
S&Q: Off S&Q: On
59.94i 60.00 to 3800 —
50i 50.00 to 3500 —
29.97P 29.99 to 4100 32.01 to 4100
23.98P 23.99 to 3700 32.02 to 3700
25P 25.00 to 3900 32.03 to 3900
System
frequency
Shutter speed (unit: Hz)
S&Q: Off S&Q: On
59.94P 60.07 to 4100 32.01 to 4100
50P 50.03 to 3900 32.03 to 3900
29.97P 29.99 to 4100 32.01 to 4100
23.98P 23.99 to 3700 32.02 to 3700
25P 25.00 to 3900 32.03 to 3900
OPERATION >Format
>HD System Line setting
in the setup menu
Number of
accumulated frames
1080 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16
720 2, 4, 6, 8, 16
Selecting the Shutter Mode and
Shutter Speed
Setting the Electronic Shutter
58
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
To switch between Speed mode and
Angle mode
1Select OPEARTION >Shutter Select
>Shutter Select in the setup menu (see
page 124).
2Turn the MENU knob to select Second
or Degree, and then press the knob.
To set the shutter mode and standard-
mode shutter speed
Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained
even when the camcorder power is turned off.
1Push the SHUTTER selector from ON
to SELECT.
The current shutter setting indication appears
for about three seconds.
2Before the shutter setting indication
disappears, push the SHUTTER
selector down to SELECT again and
repeat this until the desired mode or
speed appears.
When all modes and speeds are displayed,
the display changes in the following order.
Note
Depending on the frame rate setting (see page 83), some
shutter speeds cannot be selected in Slow & Quick
Motion mode. These speeds are replaced by the slowest
selectable shutter speed.
Example: If you perform Slow & Quick Motion
shooting when setting the frame rate to 60 and the video
format to HQ1280/29.97P
The shutter speed is indicated as follows.
When Slow & Quick Motion mode is off
1/40t1/50t1/60t1/100t...
When Slow & Quick Motion mode is on
1/60t1/60t1/60t1/100t...
To set the shutter speed in ECS mode
1Set the shutter mode to ECS (see the
previous item).
2Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired frequency or number of frames.
To set the shutter speed in SLS mode
1Set OPERATION >Shutter >Slow
Shutter in the setup menu to [On] (see
page 124).
2Select the desired number of
accumulated frames with
OPERATION >Shutter >SLS Frames
in the setup menu.
Speed Mode (with system frequency 59.94i)
ECS Mode
Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment 59
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
The reference value for automatic iris adjustment
can be changed to aid the shooting of clear
pictures of back-lit subjects, or to prevent blown-
out highlights. The reference value for the lens
iris can be set within the following range with
respect to the standard value.
• 0.25 to 1 (increasing by increments of 0.25):
About 0.25 to 1 stop further open
• –0.25 to –1 (decreasing by increments of 0.25):
About 0.25 to 1 stop further close
Also you can set the area where light detection
occurs.
To change the reference value
1Set OPERATION >Auto Iris >Iris
Override in the setup menu to On (see
page 122).
2Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
3Turn the MENU knob to change the
reference value.
Note
Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode is
not ECS.
An indicator of the current reference value is
shown at the iris position indication (see
page 34) on the viewfinder screen.
To make the iris more open
Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as
seen from the front of the camcorder.
Select one of 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, or 1.
To stop down the iris
Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen
from the front of the camcorder.
Select one of –0.25, –0.5, –0.75, or –1.
The changed reference value is retained until
the power of the camcorder is turned off.
Even if the reference value is changed, it
reverts to the standard value every time the
power is turned on.
To set the automatic iris window
1Set OPERATION >Auto Iris >Iris
Window Indication in the setup menu to
On.
The current automatic iris window appears
on the viewfinder screen.
If it is not necessary to display the auto iris
window on the screen, set to Off.
2Turn the MENU knob to select Iris
Window, and then press the knob.
3Turn the MENU knob until the desired
auto iris window appears, and then
press the knob.
If you select “Var”, the following items
become effective and you can set the window
of the desired size. Set the following items
with MAINTENANCE >Auto Iris2.
When you exit the menu, the auto iris window
selected in step 3 appears.
Unless you need to keep this window displayed,
set OPERATION >Auto Iris >Iris Window
Indication in the setup menu to Off.
To counter problems with very bright
highlights
If the subject is too bright, the iris may close too
much, leaving the overall image dark, or the
highlights may be blown out. In such cases,
setting the highlight clip function on reduces the
luminance range, avoiding problems from the
automatic iris correction.
Set OPERATION >Auto Iris >Clip High Light in
the setup menu to On.
Changing the Reference
Value for Automatic Iris
Adjustment
Item Setting
Iris Var Width The width of the window
Iris Var Height The height of the window
Iris Var H Pos The position of the window
in the horizontal direction
Iris Var V Pos. The position of the window
in the vertical direction.
The shaded parts indicate the
area where light detection
Adjusting the Audio Level
60
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
When you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to
AUTO, the input levels of analog audio signals
recorded on each channel are adjusted
automatically. You can also make manual
adjustments.
Note
Even if you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to AUTO,
the input levels of digital audio signals are not adjusted
automatically.
Target audio level for manual audio level
adjustment
Make adjustment using –20 dB as the target level.
If the audio level meter shows a maximum level
of 0 dB, then it indicates that the input audio level
is excessive.
1To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO
IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector, set the
AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 switch to
REAR.
To adjust both input signals, set both
switches to REAR.
2Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es)
corresponding to the channel(s) selected
in step 1 to MANUAL.
3With the LEVEL knob(s) for the
channel(s) selected in step 1, adjust so
that the audio level meter shows up to
–20 dB for a normal input volume.
Correspondence between recording level
adjustments and audio level controls
On MAINTENANCE >Audio in the setup menu,
you can select which audio level control controls
the audio recording level of the input to each of
the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors. The
correspondences between the settings of the menu
items and the controls are as follows.
Rear1/WRR Level: Channel 1 recording level
Rear2/WRR Level: Channel 2 recording level
Note
When you have operation of the LEVEL (CH1/CH2)
knobs and MIC LEVEL control linked together, if the
MIC LEVEL control is set to 0, the audio signals on
channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position
of the MIC LEVEL control before adjusting the LEVEL
(CH1/CH2) knobs.
1Set either or both of the AUDIO IN
switch(es) to FRONT.
Adjusting the Audio
Level
Manually Adjusting the Audio
Levels of the Audio Inputs from
the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
Connectors
Target input level
Excessive input level
Setting Knob
Side1 LEVEL (CH1) knob
Front MIC LEVEL control
Front+Side1 LEVEL (CH1) knob and MIC
LEVEL control (linked
operation)
Setting Knob
Side2 LEVEL (CH2) knob
Front MIC LEVEL control
Front+Side2 LEVEL (CH2) knob and MIC
LEVEL control (linked
operation)
Manually Adjusting the Audio
Level of the MIC IN Connector
Adjusting the Audio Level 61
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
2Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) for
the desired channel(s) selected in step 1
to MANUAL.
3Turn the MIC LEVEL control, and
adjust so that the audio level meter
shows up to –20 dB for a normal input
volume.
Correspondence between recording level
adjustments and audio level controls
On MAINTENANCE >Audio in the setup menu,
you can select which audio level control controls
the audio recording level of the front microphone
input. The correspondences between the settings
of the menu items and the controls are as follows.
MIC CH1 Level: Channel 1 recording level
MIC CH2 Level: Channel 2 recording level
Note
When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL control
and LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs linked together, if the
LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs are set to 0, the audio signals
on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the
position of the LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs before
adjusting the MIC LEVEL control.
Selecting the recorded audio
You can select the audio recorded on audio
channels 3 and 4 with the AUDIO IN CH3/CH4
switches.
You can have the selection made automatically,
as follows.
To automatically select the same audio as on
channels 1 and 2
Set MAINTENANCE >Audio >Audio CH3/4
Mode of the setup menu to [Ch1/2].
Adjusting the audio recording levels
To adjust automatically
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 switch to
AUTO.
To adjust manually
1Set the AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 switch
to MANUAL.
2Select the knobs that adjust the audio
levels with the Audio CH3 Level and
Audio CH4 Level items under
MAINTENANCE >Audio in the setup
menu.
Audio CH3 Level: Channel 3 recording
level
Audio CH4 Level: Channel 4 recording
level
Setting Knob
Side1 LEVEL (CH1) knob
Front MIC LEVEL control
Front+Side1 LEVEL (CH1) knob and MIC
LEVEL control (linked
operation)
Setting Knob
Side2 LEVEL (CH2) knob
Front MIC LEVEL control
Front+Side2 LEVEL (CH2) knob and MIC
LEVEL control (linked
operation)
Recording Audio on Channels 3
and 4
CH3 switch Channel 3 recording target
FRONT Front microphone audio
REAR Audio signal input to AUDIO IN
CH1 connector
WIRELESS Wireless microphone audio
CH4 switch Channel 4 recording target
FRONT Front microphone audio
REAR Audio signal input to AUDIO IN
CH2 connector
WIRELESS Wireless microphone audio
Setting Knob
Side3 LEVEL (CH3) knob
Front MIC LEVEL control
Front+Side3 LEVEL (CH3) knob and
MIC LEVEL control (linked
operation)
Setting Knob
Side4 LEVEL (CH4) knob
Front MIC LEVEL control
Setting the Time Data
62
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
You can now adjust the levels of audio
channels 3 and 4 with the knobs selected
here.
Note
When picture cache mode is enabled, it is not possible to
set time data, even if you set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN
switch to SET. If you want to set time data, first exit
picture cache mode.
The timecode setting range is from 00 : 00 : 00 :
00 to 23 : 59 : 59 : 29 (hours : minutes : seconds :
frames).
1Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to
switch the display in the LCD monitor
to status display.
2Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.
3Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK
switch to PRESET.
4Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
SET.
The first (leftmost) digit of timecode flashes.
5Use the up and down arrow buttons to
change values, and use the left and right
arrow buttons to move the flashing
digit. Repeat until all digits are set.
To reset the timecode value to 00:00:00:00
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
6Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN or R-RUN.
F-RUN: Free run. The timecode generator
keeps running.
R-RUN: Recording run. The timecode
generator runs only while recording.
To set the drop frame mode/non-drop frame
mode
You can select the drop frame (DF) mode or non-
drop frame (NDF) mode on MAINTENANCE
>Timecode in the setup menu.
Front+Side4 LEVEL (CH4) knob and
MIC LEVEL control (linked
operation)
Setting Knob Setting the Time Data
Setting the Timecode
Setting the Time Data 63
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
To make the timecode consecutive
When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to
R-RUN, recording a number of scenes on the
media normally produces consecutive timecode.
However, once you remove the media and record
on another media, the timecode will no longer be
consecutive when you use the original media
again for recording. In this case, to make the
timecode consecutive, set the PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch to REGEN.
Saving the real Time in the Timecode
Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
CLOCK saves the real time in the timecode.
When it is necessary to set the actual time, use
MAINTENANCE >Clock Set >Date/Time in the
setup menu.
For details, see “Setting the Date/Time of the
Internal Clock” (page 41).
By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal
digits), you can record user information such as
the date, time, or scene number on the timecode
track.
1Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to
switch the display in the LCD monitor
to status display.
2Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT.
3Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
SET.
The first (leftmost) digit flashes.
4Use the up and down arrow buttons to
change values, and use the left and right
arrow buttons to move the flashing
digit. Repeat until all digits are set.
To reset the user bit data to 00 00 00 00
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
5Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN or R-RUN, corresponding to the
desired operating mode for the
timecode generator.
To store the user bit setting in memory
The user bit setting (apart from the real time) is
automatically retained in memory even when the
power is turned off.
You can synchronize the internal timecode
generator of this camcorder with an external
generator for the regeneration of an external
timecode. You can also synchronize the timecode
generators of other camcorders/VTRs with the
internal generator of this camcorder.
Connections for timecode
synchronization
Connect both the reference video signal and the
external timecode as illustrated below.
Example 1: Synchronizing with an external
timecode
Setting the User Bits
Synchronizing the Timecode
External timecode
1GENLOCK IN connector
2TC IN connector
Reference video signal
Setting the Time Data
64
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
Example 2: Interconnecting a number of
camcorders (including one reference
camcorder)
To lock the timecode to an external
source
1Turn on the POWER switch.
2Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK
switch to PRESET.
3Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN.
4Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.
5Supply a timecode signal and a
reference video signal complying with
the SMPTE standard and in proper
phase relationship, to the TC IN
connector and to the GENLOCK IN
connector, respectively.
This operation synchronizes the internal
timecode generator with the external
timecode. After about 10 seconds, you can
disconnect the external timecode without
losing the synchronization.
Notes
• When you finish the above procedure, the internal
timecode is immediately synchronized with the
external timecode and the counter display will show
the value of the external timecode. However, wait for
a few seconds until the sync generator stabilizes before
recording.
• If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the
same as the system frequency of the camcorder, the
camcorder cannot be correctly genlocked. In such a
case, the internal timecode is not correctly
synchronized with the external timecode.
User bit settings during timecode
synchronization
When the timecode is synchronized, only the time
data is synchronized with the external timecode
value.
To release the timecode synchronization
First disconnect the external timecode, then set
the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.
To change the power supply from the battery
pack to an external power supply during
timecode synchronization
To maintain a continuous power supply, connect
the external power supply to the DC IN connector
before removing the battery pack. You may lose
timecode synchronization if you remove the
battery pack first.
Camcorder synchronization during timecode
synchronization
During timecode synchronization, the camcorder
is genlocked to the reference video signal input
from the GENLOCK IN connector.
1VIDEO OUT connector
2TC OUT connector
3TC IN connector
4GENLOCK IN connector
To another camcorder to be synchronized
Setting Shot Data 65
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
While color bars are output, shot data can be
displayed.
You can select which shot data is superimposed
on the color bars with OPEARTION >Shot
Display in the setup menu.
Shot Date
To superimpose the shot date, turn the MENU
knob to set Shot Date to [On] and press the knob.
Shot Time
To superimpose the shot time, turn the MENU
knob to set Shot Time to [On] and press the knob.
Shot Model Name
To superimpose the model name, turn the MENU
knob to set Shot Model Name to [On] and press
the knob.
Shot Serial Number
To superimpose the serial number, turn the
MENU knob to set Shot Serial Number to [On]
and press the knob.
Shot ID Select
To superimpose a shot ID created arbitrarily, turn
the MENU knob to set Shot ID Select to one of
[ID-1] to [ID-4] and press the knob.
To create a shot ID, see the next sexton “Creating
a Shot ID”.
Up to four shot IDs of up to 16 characters can be
created.
To create a shot ID
1With OPEARTION >Shot ID in the
setup menu, turn the MENU knob to
select a shot ID to create (ID-1 to ID-4)
and press the knob.
The shot ID setting screen appears.
2Follow the procedure in “To enter text ”
(page 110) to create a shot ID.
Setting Shot Data
Creating a Shot ID
Example display of shot data
Checking Camcorder Settings and Status Information (Status Screens)
66
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
The status screens allow you to check camcorder
settings and various types of status information.
There are five status screens, listed below.
To display status screens
With no menu is displayed, press the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch up to the
CANCEL/PRST side. Each push selects the next
status screen, in the order given in the table
above.
CAMERA status screen
This screen displays settings and status
information related to shooting.
White Bal: White balance status
Gain: GAIN switch status
Zoom Speed: Zoom speed set with the lens
ZOOM button
Zebra: Zebra status
Skin Detail: Skin details status
AUDIO status screen
This screen displays settings and status
information related to audio input and output.
CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4: Audio level meters
and input sources
Wind Filter: Wind filter settings
VIDEO status screen
This screen displays settings and status
information related to recording and playback.
Video Format: Video format
Rec Mode: Recording bit rate (HD mode only)
Output&i.LINK: Output&i.LINK setting and
i.LINK usage status
SDI Output: HD/SD SDI OUT connector output
setting
Down Converter: SD output down converter
setting (HD mode only)
ASSIGN SWITCH status screen
This screen displays the names of the functions
assigned to assignable switches
Checking Camcorder
Settings and Status
Information (Status
Screens)
Status screen Information displayed
CAMERA status Settings and status information
related to shooting
AUDIO status Settings and status information
related to audio input and
output
VIDEO status Settings and status information
related to recording and
playback
ASSIGN
SWITCH status
Names of functions assigned
to assignable switches
BATTERY/
MEDIA status
Status of the battery mounted
on the camcorder and the
media status
Checking Camcorder Settings and Status Information (Status Screens) 67
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
BATTERY/MEDIA status screen
This screen displays the status of the battery
mounted on the camcorder and the media status.
Battery: The remaining battery capacity
Charge Count: The number of times the battery
has been charged
HDD A/HDD B: Remaining battery capacity of
PHU-120R (in FAT mode)
Media A/Media B:
• Remaining capacity of media
• Recordable time
• Approximate writable lifetime (Life)
“Life 100%” is shown for unused media.
Handling SxS Memory Cards
68
Chapter 4 Shooting
This camcorder records video and audio on SxS
memory cards (not supplied) loaded into one or
both of its memory card slots.
The PHU-120R Professional Harddisk Unit or
MEAD-MS01/SD01 Media Adaptor can also be
used for recording (when the recording mode is
FAT). For details, refer to the Supplement
supplied in the CD-ROM (labeled “Manuals for
Solid-State Memory Camcorder”).
SxS memory cards that can be used with
this camcorder
Use the following Sony SxS memory cards (SxS
PRO or SxS-1) with this camcorder.
SxS PRO
• SBP-16 (16 GB)
• SBP-32 (32 GB)
SxS-1
• SBS-32G1A (32 GB)
• SBS-64G1A (64 GB)
Proper operation cannot be guaranteed when
memory cards other than SxS PRO and SxS-1 are
used.
The memory cards listed above comply with the
ExpressCard memory card standard.
• SxS, SxS PRO and SxS-1 are trademarks of
Sony Corporation.
• The ExpressCard label and logo are property of
the Personal Computer Memory Card
International Association (PCMCIA) and are
licensed to Sony Corporation. Other trademarks
and trade names are the property of their
respective owners.
Notes on the use of SxS memory cards
• Recorded data may be lost or corrupted in the
following cases.
- When the camcorder is subjected to shock or
vibrations during reading, writing, or
formatting of an SxS memory card, and when
the camcorder is powered off or an SxS
memory card is removed during reading,
writing, or formatting
- When the camcorder is used in an
environment subject to static electricity or
electric noise
• Do not use or store SxS memory cards in
locations that are:
- Outside the specified environmental ranges
- Very hot, such in as vehicles parked in the sun
during summer, or exposed to direct sunlight,
or near heaters
- Subject to high humidity and corrosion
• When inserting a memory card, insert with the
label side facing the correct direction.
• Carry and store SxS memory cards in their
cases, and lock the cases securely.
• To use SxS-1 memory card “SBS-32G1” in
UDF mode, the software may need to be
updated. For details, access the Sony website
closest to your area. (Refer to the top page of the
CD-ROM Manual on the supplied CD-ROM.)
• Guard against accidents and inadvertent data
loss by backing up the data stored on SxS
memory cards. Sony cannot be responsible for
any consequences of damage to or loss of data
stored on SxS memory cards.
• Do not attach anything other than the supplied
labels in the designated label space. When
attaching a label, make sure it does not protrude
beyond the label space.
Chapter4Shooting
Handling SxS Memory
Cards
About SxS Memory Cards
Handling SxS Memory Cards 69
Chapter 4 Shooting
• Use this camcorder to format SxS memory
cards that will be used with this camcorder.
When memory cards are formatted on another
unit, the format is regarded as an invalid format,
making it necessary to format the memory cards
again.
However, note that the format and delete
functions of this camcorder do not completely
remove data from memory cards. Before
discarding or disposing of a memory card, erase
it using commercial data erasure software, or
physically destroy it. Sony cannot be
responsible for any failure to erase data
completely.
• Clip operations may not be possible when the
remaining capacity of the media is low. In this
case, use a computer to delete unneeded files
and try again.
• Open the memory card case completely before
storing a card in the case or removing a card
from the case.
Preventing accidental erasure
You can prevent accidental recording, editing,
and deletion of data on an SxS memory card by
setting the write protect switch to the WP side.
Note
Do not touch the write protect switch while an SxS
memory card is loaded in a card slot. Eject the card
before setting the write protect switch.
To load SxS memory cards
1Slide the cover to the left to open.
2Insert an SxS memory card into a card
slot.
The ACCESS lamp lights in orange, and then
lights in green to indicate that the memory
card is usable.
3Close the cover.
ACCESS lamp status indications
Card slots A and B each have an ACCESS lamp
to indicate the slot status.
SxS PRO 8GB
Label space
Write protect switch
Loading and Ejecting SxS Memory
Cards
Lamp Slot status
Lights in orange Accessing the SxS memory card
(lights during data reading and
writing)
Lights in green Standby (the loaded SxS
memory card is ready for
recording or playback)
Not lit • No SxS memory card is
loaded.
• An unusable card is loaded.
• An SxS memory card is
loaded, but the other slot is
selected.
Insert with the label
side facing right.
Handling SxS Memory Cards
70
Chapter 4 Shooting
To eject SxS memory cards
1Open the cover, and then press the
EJECT button to release the lock and
pull the button out.
2Press the EJECT button again to eject
the card.
Note
Data integrity cannot be guaranteed if you power the
camcorder off or remove a memory card while the card
is being accessed. Doing so may corrupt all data recorded
on the card. Always make sure that the ACCESS lamp is
lit green or not lit before you power the camcorder off or
remove a memory card.
When SxS memory cards are loaded in both slot
A and slot B, you can press the SLOT SELECT
button to select the SxS memory card to use.
The camcorder switches automatically to the
other card if the selected card becomes full during
recording.
Note
The SLOT SELECT button is disabled during playback.
Even when pressed, it does not change the selected slot.
Button operations are enabled when a thumbnail screen
(see page 91) is displayed.
When you load an unformatted memory card,
load a memory card that has been formatted to
other specifications, or load a memory card that
has been formatted in UDF mode into the
camcorder set to FAT mode, a message to
confirm if formatting is to be executed appears in
the viewfinder (see page 71). In this case, format
the memory card in the following way.
SxS memory cards are formatted in FAT mode as
factory default.
Note
SxS memory cards must be formatted on an
XDCAM EX device or on this camcorder. Cards
in other formats cannot be used.
To format (initialize) a memory card
If the message for formatting is displayed, turn
the MENU knob to select “Execute”, and then
press the knob.
Execution of the format starts.
During execution of the format, a progress
indication appears (%), and the ACCESS lamp
lights in orange.
When formatting is completed, the completion
message is displayed for three seconds.
Recording and playback during format execution
Even during execution of a format, recording and
playback are possible using an SxS memory card
loaded into the other card slot.
If the format operation fails
A format operation may fail because the SxS
memory card is write protected, or because it is
not the type of card specified for use with this
camcorder.
Selecting the SxS Memory Card to
Use
Press the button once
to release the lock.
Formatting (Initializing) SxS
Memory Cards
Handling SxS Memory Cards 71
Chapter 4 Shooting
In this case, an error message appears. Following
the instructions in the error message and
exchange the card for an SxS memory card that
can be used with this camcorder.
To format by menu operation
When no formatting message is displayed, you
can execute formatting by menu operation.
1Select OPERATION >Format Media in
the setup menu (see page 113).
2Select [Media(A)] (slot A) or [Media(B)]
(slot B).
3Turn the MENU knob to select
[Execute], and then press the knob.
The confirmation message for formatting is
displayed on the viewfinder screen.
4Turn the MENU knob to select
“Execute”, and press the knob.
Execution of the format starts.
During execution of the format, a progress
indication appears (%), and the ACCESS lamp
lights in orange.
When formatting is completed, the completion
message is displayed for three seconds.
Notes
• All data is erased when you format a memory card,
including setup files and all of the recorded video data.
• Use the format function of this camcorder to format
SxS memory cards for use on this camcorder. The
formats of cards formatted on other devices are not
recognized as valid formats, making it necessary to
format them again on this camcorder.
An error message or a message to confirm if
formatting is to be executed appears.
Cases in which an error message appears
The message “Cannot Use Media(A)/
Unsupported File System” appears in the
viewfinder in the following cases.
• An SxS memory card which was used for
recording in UDF mode is loaded into the
camcorder set to FAT mode.
• An SxS memory card which was used for
recording in FAT mode is loaded into the
camcorder set to UDF mode.
• An SxS memory card which was formatted in
FAT mode is loaded into the camcorder set to
UDF mode.
Cases in which a message to confirm if
formatting is to be executed appears
When an SxS memory card which was formatted
in UDF mode is loaded into the camcorder set to
FAT mode. a message to confirm if formatting is
to be executed in FAT mode appears in the
viewfinder (see page 70).
You can check the remaining capacity of the SxS
memory cards loaded in the two slots by checking
the recording media remaining capacity display
in the viewfinder.
The camcorder calculates the remaining
recording time for the media in each slot on the
basis of the current video format (recording bit
rate), and displays it in units of minutes.
You can also check the remaining time in the
BATTERY/MEDIA status screen (see page 67).
Note
The mark appears when a memory card is write
protected.
When to exchange SxS memory cards
• The warning message “Media Near Full”
appears, the WARNING indicator and the REC
indication on the viewfinder screen flash, and
the buzzer sounds when the total remaining
recording time of the two memory cards falls to
five minutes during recording.
Exchange one of the cards for media with
available recording capacity.
If You Load a Memory Card
Formatted in the Different
Recording Mode from the Mode
Selected on the Camcorder
Checking the Remaining
Recording Time
Handling SxS Memory Cards
72
Chapter 4 Shooting
• If you continue recording, the message “Media
Full” appears and recording stops when the total
remaining recording time falls to 0.
Note
About up to 600 clips can be recorded on one SxS
memory card.
The display of remaining recording time changes to “0”
and the message “Media Full” appears when the clip
limit is reached.
If for any reason an error should occur in a
memory card, the card must be restored before
use.
When you load an SxS memory card that needs to
be restored, a message appears in the viewfinder
to ask whether you want to restore it.
To restore a card
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], and
then press the knob.
The restoration starts.
During the restoration, a execution message
appears, the progress is displayed (%), and the
ACCESS lamp lights in orange.
When the restoration finishes, a completion
message is displayed for three seconds.
If restoration fails
• Write protected SxS memory cards and cards on
which memory errors have occurred cannot be
restored. A warning message appears for such
cards. Follow the instructions in the message
and unprotect the card or replace it with another
card.
• SxS memory cards on which memory errors
have occurred may become usable if they are
reformatted.
• In some cases, some clips can be restored while
others cannot. The restored clips can be played
normally.
• If the message “Could not Restore Some Clips”
keeps appearing after repeated attempts at
restoration, it may be possible to restore the SxS
memory card with the following procedure.
1Use the camcorder’s copy function (see
page 102) or the supplied application
software (see page 170) to copy the
required clips to another SxS memory card.
2Format the unusable SxS memory card on
the camcorder.
3Copy the required clips back to the newly
formatted SxS memory card.
Recording and playback during restoration
Even while restoration is in progress, you can
record and play an SxS memory card in the other
card slot.
Note
For restoration of media recorded with this camcorder,
be sure to use this camcorder. Media recorded with a
device other than this camcorder or with another
camcorder of different version (even of the same model)
may not be restored using this camcorder.
Restoring SxS Memory Cards
Handling USB Flash Drives 73
Chapter 4 Shooting
In UDF mode, you can connect a USB flash drive
connected to the external device to record, save
and load the following data.
• Record proxy data (see page 85)
• Load planning metadata (see page 87)
• Save and load setting data (see page 160)
The following Sony USB flash drives are
recommended for use with this camcorder.
Pocket Bit L Series
• USM16GL
• USM8GL
• USM4GL
Pocket Bit Hi-Speed LX Series
• USM32GLX
• USM16GLX
•USM8GLX
• USM4GLX (available in Japan only)
Notes
• Use USB flash drives with capacity from 4 GB to 32
GB.
• USB flash drives other than the recommended flash
drives listed above may not be recognized when
connected to the USB connector.
USB flash drives must be formatted with the
FAT32 file system.
Note
Before using a drive, format it on this camcorder or a PC.
If a drive formatted on a PC cannot be used, format it on
the camcorder.
1Connect a USB flash drive to the
external device connector.
When the drive is unformatted or has been
formatted to other specifications, a message
to confirm if formatting is to be executed
appears on the viewfinder screen.
2Turn the MENU knob to select
“Execute” and press the knob.
When formatting is completed, the message
“Format USB Memory Done” is displayed.
The \MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\MEMDISC
folder and the \General\Sony\Planning folder
are automatically created in the drive.
If the format operation fails
A format operation may fail because the USB
flash drive is write protected, or because it is not
the type of drive specified for use with this
camcorder.
In this case, an error message appears. Following
the instructions in the error message and
exchange the drive for one that can be used with
this camcorder.
To format by menu operation
When no formatting message is displayed, you
can execute formatting by menu operation.
1Connect a USB flash drive to the
external device connector.
2Select OPERATION >USB > Format
USB Memory in the setup menu.
3Turn the MENU knob to select
[Execute], and then press the knob.
The confirmation message for formatting is
displayed on the viewfinder screen.
4Turn the MENU knob to select
“Execute” and press the knob.
A progress indication appears (%), and
execution of the format starts.
When formatting is completed, the message
“Format USB Memory Done” is displayed.
The \MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\MEMDISC
folder and the \General\Sony\Planning folder
are automatically created in the drive.
Notes
• All data is erased when you format a USB flash drive,
including setup files and all of the recorded video data.
• Use the format function of this camcorder to format
USB flash drives for use on this camcorder. The
formats of drives formatted on other devices are not
recognized as valid formats, making it necessary to
format them again on this camcorder.
Handling USB Flash
Drives
UDF
Formatting (Initializing) USB
Flash Drives
Basic Operations
74
Chapter 4 Shooting
When you load a USB flash drive that can be
mounted normally because the file system is
destroyed, a message appears on the viewfinder
screen to ask whether you want to restore it.
Pressing the MENU knob after turning the
MENU knob to select “Execute” starts execution
of the format and a progress indication appears
(%).
When formatting is completed, the message
“Format USB Memory Done” is displayed.
This section explains the basic shooting and
recording procedures.
Before starting to shoot, inspect the camera
system to verify that it is operating properly.
1Attach a fully charged battery pack (see
page 35).
2Select the recording mode (see page 53).
3Load one or two SxS memory cards (see
page 69).
If you load two cards, the camcorder
switches automatically to the second card
when the first card becomes full.
4Set the camcorder’s POWER switch
(see page 15) to ON.
5Make the following settings.
Marker display: On (see page 118)
Iris: Auto (see page 59)
Zoom: Auto
Camera output: Select the picture currently
being shot (camera picture), and turn the
DCC function on (see page 19).
Timecode advance mode: F-RUN (Free
Run) or R-RUN (Rec Run) (see page 62)
Audio input channel selection: Auto (see
page 26)
6Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the
BLACK side to adjust the black balance
(see page 54).
7Select a filter according to the lighting
conditions, and adjust the white balance
(see page 55).
8Point the camcorder at the subject, and
adjust the focus and zoom.
9If you are using the electronic shutter,
select an appropriate shutter mode and
speed (see page 57).
Restoring USB Flash Drives Basic Operations
Basic Operations 75
Chapter 4 Shooting
10 Do one of the following to start
recording.
- Press the REC START button (see
page 17).
- Press the VTR button on the lens.
- Turn on the assignable switch to which the
Rec function has been assigned (see
page 156).
During recording, the TALLY indicators, the
tally indicator on the front panel of the
viewfinder, and the REC indication on the
viewfinder screen light. Adjust the zoom and
focus as required.
Notes
• Never remove the battery pack while the
camcorder is recording (while the ACCESS lamp
on the right-side panel is lit in blue and the
ACCESS lamp in the card slot section is lit in
orange). Doing so risks the loss of several
seconds of data before the recording was
interrupted, because internal processing will not
end normally.
• The playback control buttons (EJECT, F REV, F
FWD, NEXT, PREV, PLAY/PAUSE, STOP) do
not function during recording.
11 To stop recording, perform one of the
operations listed in step 10.
The TALLY indicators, the tally indicator on
the front panel of the viewfinder, and the
REC indication on the viewfinder screen go
out, and camcorder enters recording standby
(STBY) mode.
A clip is created from the video and audio
data and the metadata recorded between steps
10 and 11.
Note
When the recording mode is UDF, if you stop
recording within two seconds of starting, recording
continues and this results in a two-second clip.
To check the recording (recording review)
With the camcorder in recording standby
(STBY) mode, turn on the assignable switch
to which the Rec Review function or the
Freeze Mix function has been assigned (see
page 155).
The camcorder plays the entire last clip, or
the last few seconds of that clip (three
seconds or 10 seconds), and then returns to
standby mode.
You can use MAINTENANCE >Camera
Config >Rec Review in the setup menu (see
page 142) to change the playback time.
When the Rec Review function is assigned to
the RET button on the lens, you can also
conduct a review by using the RET button.
12 Repeat steps 10 and 11 to continue
recording.
With each repetition, another clip is created
on the memory card.
Notes
• You cannot resume recording for about one second
after stopping recording.
• The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on
one memory card is 600. Even if the memory card has
enough free capacity to record more clips, when 600
clips have been recorded, no further recording is
possible.
Clip file sizes
Clip file sizes vary according to file formats.
If you continue recording for an extended period,
recorded materials may be segmented into
multiple files, depending on the file size (the
maximum number of partitions is 99).
The camcorder regards continuous recording as
one clip even if it has been segmented into
multiple files.
Clip names
Eight-character clips names (consisting of a four-
character prefix and a four-digit number) are
generated automatically for clips recorded by this
camcorder.
Example: ABCD0001
You can also use OPERATION >Clip >Title
Prefix (see page 126) in the setup menu to set the
clip name prefix to a user-specified string of
characters (four to 46 characters in length). (A
File
format
File size Clip size
MP4 Less than 4 GB Less than half an
hour
AVI Less than 2 GB Less than 9 minutes
and 30 seconds
MXF Less than 43 GB Less than 6 hours
Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3
Basic Operations
76
Chapter 4 Shooting
user-specified prefix cannot be changed after
recording.)
The four-digit number at the end of clip names is
generated automatically, counting up in order as
clips are recorded.
When the camcorder is in standby (STBY) mode,
you can play all or part of the most recently
recorded clip (see page 75).
1Insert the SxS memory card to play (see
page 69).
2Press the PREV button (see page 21) or
the F REV button (see page 21) to cue
up the clip to play.
3Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator lights, and the
playback picture appears in the viewfinder.
To pause the playback
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes during
pause.
Press the button again to return to playback mode.
To play at high speed
Press the F FWD button (see page 21) or the
F REV button (see page 21).
To return to normal playback, press the PLAY/
PAUSE button.
To switch between memory cards
When two memory cards are loaded, press the
SLOT SELECT button (see page 25) to select the
active slot.
It is not possible to switch between memory cards
during playback.
To end playback
Press the STOP button: Playback stops, and the
camcorder enters E-E mode.
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Playback
stops, and a thumbnail screen (see page 91)
appears in the viewfinder.
Playback also stops and the timecode screen
appears in the viewfinder when you start
recording during playback, and when you eject an
SxS memory card.
To display the camera picture during play
(Live & Play function)
Live & Play is a function that allows you to
display the camera picture (live video) on the
viewfinder screen during play.
This allows you to frame the next scene or adjust
the focus and exposure while checking the
camera picture (live video) on the viewfinder
screen. To frame the next scene, you can use this
function together with the Freeze Mix function
(see page 84).
The Live & Play function is enabled when the
camcorder is set up as follows.
To use the Live & Play function, set
OPERATION >Output >Live&Play in the setup
menu to [On].
Notes
• The Live & Play function cannot be turned on and off
during playback or during thumbnail display.
• The Live & Play function cannot be used in Frame
Rec, Interval Rec, and Slow & Quick Motion modes,
and when the Slow Shutter function is enabled.
• To use the Live & Play function together with the
Freeze Mix function, start by operating while viewing
the LCD monitor (with the DISP SEL/EXPAND
button pressed to set the display mode other than
STATUS). When the operation finishes and the Freeze
Mix function is activated, the same picture appears on
the viewfinder screen.
• The play picture cannot be switched to the camera
picture when playing a clip that was recorded with a
number of system lines or a system frequency that
differs from the current settings of this camcorder.
• The output from the HD/SD SDI OUT connector and
the VIDEO OUT connector may freeze momentarily
when the output is switched between the play picture
and the camera picture.
Playing Recorded Clips
HD/SD Number of system
lines
System frequency
HD 1080 1920/59.94i
1920/50i
1440/59.94i
1440/50i
720 1280/59.94P
1280/50P
SD – 59.94i
50i
59.94i
50i
Advanced Operations 77
Chapter 4 Shooting
You can use the assignable switches to delete the
last recorded clips (Last Clip DEL function).
You can also use the THUMBNAIL menu to delete all
recorded clips (All Clips DEL function) or to delete
selected clips. For details, see “Deleting Clips”
(page 103).
1Turn on the assignable switch to which
the Last Clip DEL function has been
assigned (see page 156).
A confirmation message appears.
2Turn the MENU knob to select
[Execute], and then press the knob.
On this camcorder, two types of shot marks are
available in HD mode. You can record them at
user-specified positions to make it easier for
editors to cue up those positions.
The maximum numbers of shot marks per clip
vary according to file formats.
Note
Shot marks cannot be recorded in SD mode.
You can also use the THUMBNAIL menu to add and
delete shot marks in clips. For details, see “Adding
and Deleting Shot Marks” (page 106).
To record shot marks
Do one of the following.
• Turn on an assignable switch to which Shot
Mark 1 or Shot Mark 2 has been assigned (see
page 155).
• If Lens RET has been assigned to the RET
button on the lens, operate as follows.
To record shot mark 1: Press the RET button
once.
To record shot mark 2: Press the RET button
twice in quick succession.
When a shot mark is recorded, a “Shot Mark 1” or
“Shot Mark 2” indication appears in the
viewfinder for about three seconds near the
timecode indication.
Deleting Recorded Clips Advanced Operations
Recording Shot Marks
UDF / FAT-HD
File format Maximum number
MP4 127
MXF 999
Advanced Operations
78
Chapter 4 Shooting
To make it easier for editors to select good clips,
you can set OK marks in clips recorded in HD
mode.
Note
OK marks cannot be set or deleted during recording or
playback.
To add/delete OK marks
You can use the THUMBNAIL menu to add and
delete OK marks in previously recorded clips. For
details, see “Adding and Deleting OK, NG or KP
Marks” (page 101).
The camcorder is equipped with enough internal
memory to pre-store up to 15 seconds of video
and audio data in a picture cache. This allows you
to begin recording a specified number of seconds
in advance of the time when you press a recording
start button.
Selecting picture cache mode and setting
the picture cache time
Before recording in picture cache mode, you must
select picture cache mode and set the picture
cache time (the number of seconds of video and
audio data stored to memory) in the
OPERATION menu.
The picture cache time determines how far in
advance you can start recording, counting back in
seconds from the operation that starts recording.
Note that it may not be possible to start this far in
advance in the special cases explained in the
following notes.
Notes
• Storage of picture data to memory begins when you
select picture cache mode. Therefore, if you start
recording immediately after selecting picture cache
mode, the picture data from before the selection is not
recorded.
• No data is recorded to picture cache memory during
playback or recording review and display of
thumbnails. It is not possible to record picture data
from the time you were conducting playback or a
recording review.
To select picture cache mode and set the picture
cache time
Notes
• Picture cache recording is not possible in Frame Rec,
Interval Rec, Slow & Quick Motion, and Clip
Continuous Rec mode. The camcorder exits Frame
Rec, Interval Rec, Slow & Quick Motion or Clip
Continuous Rec mode, whenever you select picture
cache mode. The camcorder exits picture cache mode
automatically whenever you select Frame Rec,
Interval Rec, Slow & Quick Motion, or Clip
Continuous Rec mode.
• The data stored in picture cache memory is cleared
when you change the system settings, for example by
selecting a different video format. Picture data from
before the change is not recorded even if you start
recording immediately after the change. The
camcorder exits picture cache mode automatically.
• It is not possible to set the picture cache time during
recording.
1In the setup menu, select OPERATION
>Rec Function >Picture Cache Rec.
For menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu
Operations” (page 109).
2Turn the MENU knob to select [On],
and then press the knob.
3Select [P. Cache Rec Time], turn the
MENU knob to select the desired
picture cache time, and then press the
knob.
You can select from 0-2sec, 2-4sec, 4-6sec,
6-8sec, 8-10sec, 10-12sec, 12-14sec, and
13-15sec.
Once made, picture cache mode settings remain
in effect until changed.
Instead of carrying out steps 1 and 2, you can also
select picture cache mode by using an assignable
switch to which the Picture Cache function has
been assigned (see page 155).
Camcorder data handling while recording in
picture cache mode
Recording procedures in picture cache mode are
basically the same as normal recording
procedures. However, note the following
differences with respect to how the camcorder
handles video, time, and output data.
Setting OK Marks
UDF / FAT-HD
Starting to Record from Pre-
stored Video (Picture Cache
Function)
Advanced Operations 79
Chapter 4 Shooting
• If you start recording while the media is being
accessed, the start point of the video that is
actually recorded may be later than the
currently specified picture cache time. Because
the delay increases as the number of recorded
clips increases, you should avoid rapid start-
and-stop recording operations in picture cache
mode.
• Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/
R-RUN switch, the advance mode of the
internal timecode generator is always F-RUN.
• In picture cache mode, you cannot set time data
by setting the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
SET.
To set time data, exit picture cache mode.
• If the remaining free capacity of the media in
the currently selected slot is less than the picture
cache time, and the media in the other slot has
enough remaining capacity, then data is
recorded to the media in the other slot.
However, no data is recorded when there is no
media in the other slot, and when the media in
the other slot does not have enough remaining
capacity. (A message appears in the viewfinder
to inform you that there is not enough remaining
capacity.)
• Shot marks are not recorded if they are set
before the recording start operation.
• When you select a video format that supports
i.LINK HDV output and play a clip that was
recorded in picture cache mode, two or more
frames with the same picture and timecode may
follow on each other.
• i.LINK output is possible during picture cache
recording. However, the picture cache time is
limited.
If power is lost during recording
• If you set the camcorder’s POWER switch to
OFF, the camcorder is powered off
automatically after a few seconds, during which
the media is accessed to record the video and
audio data stored in the camcorder’s memory up
to that point.
• If power is lost because the battery was
removed, the DC cable was disconnected, or the
power was turned off on the AC adaptor side,
then the video and audio data stored in memory
is lost. The data stored in memory is not
recorded. Be careful to avoid this when
exchanging the battery.
The camcorder’s Interval Rec function allows
you to capture time-lapse video to the
camcorder’s internal memory. This function is an
effective way to shoot slow-moving subjects.
When you start recording, the camcorder
automatically records a specified number of
frames at a specified interval time.
A pre-lighting function is available when Interval
Rec is enabled. This function automatically turns
on a video light before recording starts, which
allows you to record pictures under stable light
and color temperature conditions.
Interval Rec settings and shooting
Notes
• The Interval Rec function cannot be used at the same
time as the picture cache, Frame Rec, Slow & Quick
Motion, or Clip Continuous Rec function. When you
select Interval Rec mode, the picture cache, Frame
Rec, Slow & Quick Motion, and Clip Continuous Rec
functions are disabled. When you select picture cache,
Frame Rec, Slow & Quick Motion, or Clip Continuous
Rec mode, the Interval Rec function is disabled.
• The data stored in picture cache memory is cleared
when you change the system settings, for example by
selecting a different video format. Picture data from
before the change is not recorded even if you start
recording immediately after the change. The
camcorder exits picture cache mode automatically.
• Interval Rec settings cannot be changed during
recording.
• Interval Rec is disabled when the following formats
are selected.
- In FAT mode, SP 1440/59.94i or SP 1440/50i, when
the output setting is HD and OPERATION >Input/
Recording Time-lapse Video
(Interval Rec Function)
Interval time
Number of frames in one take
Advanced Operations
80
Chapter 4 Shooting
Output >i.LINK I/O in the setup menu is set to
[Enable]
- In FAT mode, SP 1440/23.98P (pull-down
recording)
- In UDF mode, HD420 HQ 1280×720/23.98P (pull-
down recording)
- Other than HQ 1920/23.98P or HQ 1280/23.98P,
when the output setting is SD and OPERATION
>Input/Output >i.LINK I/O in the setup menu is set
to [Enable]
To make Interval Rec settings
1Select OPERATION >Rec Function
>Interval Rec in the setup menu.
For menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu
Operations” (page 109).
2Turn the MENU knob to select [On],
and then press the knob.
The camcorder enters Interval Rec mode, the
“Interval” indication on the viewfinder
screen flashes.
(The green tally indicator in the HDVF series
viewfinder also flashes.)
3Select [Number of Frames], turn the
MENU knob to select the number of
frames to record in one take, and then
press the knob.
You can select from 1, 3, 6, 9 (or from 2, 6,
12 when the video format setting is 720/
59.94P or 720/50P).
4Select [Interval Time], turn the MENU
knob to select the desired interval, and
then press the knob.
You can select 1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 sec,
1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 min, 1 to 4/6/12/24
hour.
5As required, select [Pre-Lighting], turn
the MENU knob to select the length of
lighting time before recording starts,
and then press the knob.
You can select 1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 sec,
1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 min, 1 to 4/6/12/24
hour.
Notes
• If you want to turn the video light on before the start of
recording, set the camcorder’s LIGHT switch to
[AUTO]. The video light’s switch must also be turned
on. When this is done, the video light turns on and off
automatically. However, the video light remains lit
when the time that it is off is five seconds or less.
• If you set the LIGHT switch to [MANUAL] and turn
the video light’s switch on, the video light is always lit.
(It does not go on and off automatically.)
The camcorder exits Interval Rec mode when it is
powered off, but the number of frames, interval
time, and pre-lighting settings are maintained.
You do not need to set them again the next time
you shoot in Interval Rec mode.
To shoot in Interval Rec mode
Make the settings and preparations described in
“Basic Operations” (page 74), secure the
camcorder so that it does not move, and begin
shooting.
When recording starts, the “Interval” indication
in the viewfinder changes from flashing to lit, and
“INT REC” and “INT STBY” appear
alternatively at the position of the REC
indication. The TALLY indicators and the tally
indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder light
as they do during normal recording. (The green
tally indicator in the viewfinder flashes at high
frequencies.)
If you are using the pre-lighting function, the
video light comes on before recording starts.
To stop shooting
Stop the recording.
When shooting ends, the video data stored in
memory up to that point is written to the media.
To exit Interval Rec mode
Do one of the following.
• Set the POWER switch to OFF.
• With the camcorder in recording standby mode,
set OPERATION >Rec Function >Interval Rec
in the setup menu to “Off”.
Limitations during recording
• The i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector cannot be
used.
• Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/
R-RUN switch, the advance mode of the
internal timecode generator is always F-RUN.
• Audio cannot be recorded.
• Recording review is not possible.
• If you press the SLOT SELECT button, the
camcorder completes recording of the specified
number of frames, creates a clip, and switches
Advanced Operations 81
Chapter 4 Shooting
to the other media. (when the recording mode is
UDF)
• Genlock is not possible.
If power is lost during recording
• If you set the camcorder’s POWER switch to
OFF, the camcorder is powered off
automatically after a few seconds, during which
the media is accessed to record the video and
audio data stored in the camcorder’s memory up
to that point.
• If power is lost because the battery was
removed, the DC power cord was disconnected,
or the power was turned off on the AC adaptor
side, then the video and audio data shot up to
that point may be lost (maximum 10 seconds).
Be careful to avoid this when exchanging the
battery.
The Frame Rec function is useful for shooting
stop motion animations, such as animations with
puppets or clay figures.
Each time that you press the recording start
button, the camcorder shoots a specified number
of frames and then stops.
Frame Rec settings and shooting
Notes
• The Frame Rec function cannot be used at the same
time as the picture cache, Interval Rec, Slow & Quick
Motion, or Clip Continuous Rec function. When you
select Frame Rec mode, the picture cache, Interval
Rec, Slow & Quick Motion, and Clip Continuous Rec
functions are disabled. When you select picture cache,
Interval Rec, Slow & Quick Motion, or Clip
Continuous Rec mode, the Frame Rec function is
disabled.
• The data stored in memory is cleared when you change
the system settings, for example by selecting a
different video format. Picture data from before the
change is not recorded even if you start recording
immediately after the change. The camcorder exits
Frame Rec mode automatically.
• Frame Rec settings cannot be changed during
recording.
• Frame Rec is disabled when the following formats are
selected.
- In FAT mode, SP 1440/59.94i or SP 1440/50i, when
the output setting is HD and OPERATION >Input/
Output >i.LINK I/O in the setup menu is set to
Enable
- In FAT mode, SP 1440/23.98P (pull-down
recording)
- In UDF mode, HD420 HQ 1280×720/23.98P (pull-
down recording)
- Other than HQ 1920/23.98P or HQ 1280/23.98P,
when the output setting is SD and OPERATION
>Input/Output >i.LINK I/O in the setup menu is set
to Enable
To make Frame Rec settings
1Select OPERATION >Rec Function
>Frame Rec in the setup menu.
For menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu
Operations” (page 109).
2Turn the MENU knob to select [On],
and then press the knob.
The camcorder enters Frame Rec mode, the
“Frame Rec” indication on the viewfinder
screen flashes.
(The green tally indicator in the HDVF series
viewfinder also flashes.)
3Select [Number of Frames], turn the
MENU knob to select the number of
frames to record in one take, and then
press the knob.
You can select from 1, 3, 6, 9 (or from 2, 6,
12 when the video format setting is 720/
59.94P or 720/50P).
The camcorder exits Frame Rec mode when it is
powered off, but the setting for the number of
frames setting is maintained. You do not need to
set it again the next time you shoot in Frame Rec
mode.
To shoot in Frame Rec mode
Make the settings and preparations described in
“Basic Operations” (page 74), secure the
camcorder so that it does not move, and begin
shooting.
When recording starts, the “Frame Rec”
indication in the viewfinder changes from
flashing to lit, and “FRM REC” and “FRM
STBY” appear alternatively at the position of the
REC indication. The TALLY indicators and the
tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder
light as they do during normal recording.
Shooting Stop Motion Animations
(Frame Rec Function)
Advanced Operations
82
Chapter 4 Shooting
To stop shooting
Stop the recording.
When shooting ends, the video data stored in
memory up to that point is written to the media.
To exit Interval Rec mode
Do one of the following.
• Set the POWER switch to OFF
• With the camcorder in recording standby mode,
set OPERATION >Rec Function >Interval Rec
in the setup menu to “Off”.
Limitations during recording
• The i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector cannot be
used.
• Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/
R-RUN switch, the advance mode of the
internal timecode generator is always R-RUN.
• Audio cannot be recorded.
• Recording review is not possible.
• If you press the SLOT SELECT button, the
camcorder completes recording of the specified
number of frames, creates a clip, and switches
to the other media.
• Genlock is not possible.
If power is lost during recording
• If you set the camcorder’s POWER switch to
OFF, the camcorder is powered off
automatically after a few seconds, during which
the media is accessed to record the video and
audio data stored in the camcorder’s memory up
to that point.
• If power is lost because the battery was
removed, the DC power cord was disconnected,
or the power was turned off on the AC adaptor
side, then the video and audio data shot up to
that point may be lost (maximum 10 seconds).
Be careful to avoid this when exchanging the
battery.
When the camcorder is in HD mode and the video
format (see page 51) is set to one of the formats
listed below, you can specify a recording frame
rate that is different from the playback frame rate.
By shooting with a frame rate that differs from the
playback frame rate, you can obtain slow and
quick motion effects that are smoother than low-
speed or high-speed playback of content recorded
at the normal frame rate.
Example
When the video format is HQ 1280/23.98P, you
can obtain quick-motion effects by setting the
frame rate to 1 to 23, and obtain slow-motion
effects by setting the frame rate to 25 to 60.
Slow & Quick Motion settings and
shooting
Notes
• The Slow & Quick Motion function cannot be used at
the same time as the picture cache, Interval Rec, Frame
Rec, or Clip Continuous Rec function. When you
select Slow & Quick Motion mode, the picture cache,
Interval Rec, Frame Rec, and Clip Continuous Rec
functions are disabled. When you select picture cache,
Frame Rec, Interval Rec, or Clip Continuous Rec
mode, the Slow & Quick Motion function is disabled.
• Slow & Quick Motion is disabled when the slow
shutter function (viewfinder display “SLS”) function is
enabled. The slow shutter function is disabled when
the Slow & Quick Motion function is enabled.
• Slow & Quick Motion is disabled when OPERATION
>Input/Output >i.LINK I/O in the setup menu is set to
[Enable]. When Slow & Quick Motion is enabled,
i.LINK I/O is fixed as [Disable].
Shooting with Slow & Quick
Motion
OPERATION >Format menu
settings
Video format
Country File
System
HD System
Line
NTSC
Area or
NTSC(J)
Area
UDF 1080
HD422 50/29.97P
HD422 50/23.98P
720
HD422 50/59.94P
HD422 50/29.97P
HD422 50/23.98P
FAT 1080
HQ 1920/29.97P
HQ 1920/23.98P
720
HQ 1280/59.94P
HQ 1280/29.97P
HQ 1280/23.98P
PAL
Area
UDF 1080
HD422 50/25P
720
HD422 50/25P
HD422 50/50P
FAT 1080
HQ 1920/25P
720
HQ 1280/50P
HQ 1280/25P
Advanced Operations 83
Chapter 4 Shooting
• Slow & Quick Motion settings cannot be changed
during recording.
To make Slow & Quick Motion settings
1Select OPERATION >Rec Function >
Slow & Quick in the setup menu.
For menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu
Operations” (page 109).
2Turn the MENU knob to select [On],
and then press the knob.
The camcorder enters Slow & Quick Motion
mode, and the “S&Q STBY” indication in
the viewfinder lights.
3Select [Frame Rate], turn the MENU
knob to select the recording frame rate,
and then press the knob.
The setting range for the frame rate is as
follows.
When you finish making these settings, the
system frequency and the frame rate appear at the
top of the viewfinder screen. You can change the
frame rate while viewing the display in the
viewfinder by turning the MENU knob.
The Slow & Quick Motion mode setting and the
frame rate are retained even after the camcorder is
powered off.
To shoot in Slow & Quick Motion mode
Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
(page 74).
When recording starts, the “S&Q STBY”
indication in the viewfinder changes to the
“zS&Q REC” indication. The TALLY
indicators and the tally indicator on the front
panel of the viewfinder light as they do during
normal recording.
To stop shooting
Stop the recording.
Note
It takes longer than normal for recording to stop when
Frame Rate is set to a low value (for a slow frame rate).
To exit Slow & Quick Motion mode
With the camcorder in recording standby mode,
set OPERATION >Rec Function > Slow & Quick
in the setup menu to [Off].
Limitations during recording
• The i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector cannot be
used.
• Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/
R-RUN switch, the advance mode of the
internal timecode generator is always R-RUN.
• Audio cannot be recorded when the recording
and playback frame rates differ.
• Recording review is not possible.
• If you change the recording frame rate to a value
faster than the current shutter speed, the shutter
speed is changed to the slowest value for which
shooting is possible.
Example: If the frame rate is 32 and the shutter
speed is 1/40, and you change the frame rate to
55, then the shutter speed is changed to 1/60.
If is not possible to select a shutter speed that is
slower than the recording frame rate.
• Genlock is not possible.
Normally, a clip is created as an independent file
each time that you start and stop recording. But
this function allows you to start and stop
recording while continuously recording to the
same clip, for as long as the function remains
enabled. This is convenient when you do not want
to generate a large number of short clips, and
when you want to record without worrying about
exceeding the clip limit. It is still easy to find
recording start points, because a Rec Start essence
mark is recorded at the recording start point each
time you start recording.
System
lines
Frame rate
1080 When OPERATION >Format
>Country in the setup menu is set to
[PAL Area] in UDF mode:
1 to 25
In FAT mode or when OPERATION
>Format >Country in the setup menu
is set to other than [PAL Area] in
UDF mode:
1 to 30
720 When OPERATION >Format
>Country in the setup menu is set to
[PAL Area] in UDF mode:
1 to 50
In FAT mode or when OPERATION
>Format >Country in the setup menu
is set to other than [PAL Area] in
UDF mode:
1 to 60
Recording with the Clip
Continuous Rec Function
Advanced Operations
84
Chapter 4 Shooting
Clip Continuous Rec settings and
shooting
Notes
• The Clip Continuous Rec function cannot be used at
the same time as the Picture Cache, Interval Rec,
Frame Rec, or Slow & Quick Motion function. When
you select Clip Continuous Rec mode, the Picture
Cache, Interval Rec, Frame Rec, and Slow & Quick
Motion functions are disabled. When you select
picture cache, Frame Rec, Interval Rec, or Slow &
Quick Motion mode, the Clip Continuous Rec function
is disabled.
• The Clip Continuous Rec function is disabled when the
recording mode is FAT.
To make Clip Continuous Rec settings
1Select OPERATION >Rec Function
>Clip Continuous Rec in the setup
menu.
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 109)
for more information about menu operations.
2Turn the MENU knob to select [On],
and then press the knob.
“CONT” appears in the viewfinder, and the
function is enabled.
You can assign the Clip Continuous Rec on/off
function to one of the ASSIGN 1/2/3 switches,
ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches, and the COLOR
TEMP button.
For details, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable
Switches” (page 155).
To shoot in Clip Continuous Rec mode
Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
(page 74).
When recording starts, the “Cont” indication in
the viewfinder changes to “zREC” indication.
The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on
the front panel of the viewfinder light as they do
during normal recording.
Note
During recording or in recording standby mode (when
“Cont” indication is lit), if you remove the media, the
battery, or the power source, the media needs to be
restored. It is not possible to restore media on a device
other than this camcorder.
Exit Clip Continuous Rec mode (see page 84) and then
remove the media.
When “Cont” indication is flashing (at 1 flash/s), you can
remove the media.
To stop shooting
Stop the recording.
Note
Stop the recording after the recording continues for two
or more seconds.
To exit Clip Continuous Rec mode
With the camcorder in recording standby mode,
set OPERATION >Rec Function >Clip
Continuous Rec in the setup menu to [Off].
Limitations during recording
A single continuous clip cannot be created if you
perform one of the following operations while the
camcorder is in recording or recording standby
mode (A new clip will be created when you next
start recording.)
• Operate on a clip (lock, delete, or rename a clip)
• Change the recording format
• Turn off the POWER switch
• Playback
• Switched to thumbnail mode
The freeze mix function allows you to
temporarily overlap a still image (freeze picture)
from a clip shot in HD mode onto the current
camera picture. This makes it easier to frame the
shot.
Note
The freeze mix function is not available in the following
cases.
• When the recording format is SP 1080/23.98P (FAT
mode) or HQ 1280/23.98P (UDF mode)
• When the video formats of the recorded picture and the
camera picture differ
• When you are shooting in Slow & Quick Motion mode
or slow shutter mode
• When there is i.LINK input
To display a freeze mix picture
1Play a clip or conduct a recording
review of a clip with the same format as
the camera picture.
2Display the picture that you want to use
as the frame, and then turn on the
assignable switch to which the Freeze
Mix function has been assigned.
Framing Shots with the Freeze
Mix Function
Recording Proxy Data 85
Chapter 4 Shooting
The recording review picture is frozen and
overlaps the camera picture.
Note
The following functions are disabled at the freeze mix
times.
• Menu operations
• During Focus Mag display
• Marker display
• Zebra display
• Peaking display
• Skin tone details display
To cancel the freeze mix display
Do one of the following.
• Press an assignable switch again to which the
Freeze Mix function has been assigned.
The freeze mix display is canceled and the
display returns to the normal camera picture.
• Start recording (see page 75).
Normal recording starts.
Proxy data is made up of low-resolution video
data (MPEG-4) and audio data (A-Low) (video:
1.5 Mbps; audio: 64 Kbps per channel). This
lightweight proxy data can be used in the same
way as the original data, but it can be transferred
more quickly, for more efficient viewing and
editing.
In UDF mode, proxy data is generated and
recorded automatically when you record video
and audio with a USB flash drive connected to the
external device connector. By loading the proxy
data from the USB flash drive into a computer,
you can quickly check the recorded content or
perform rapid offline editing.
Note
Do not power this unit off or do not remove the USB
flash drive while the USB flash drive is being accessed.
Doing so may cause the loss of all data recorded on the
USB flash drive.
You can record proxy data to a USB flash drive
while recording clips to an SxS memory card.
1Set MAINTENANCE >USB >Memory
Rec in the setup menu to [Enable].
2Connect a USB flash drive formatted
with the FAT32 file system to the
external device connector (see page 73).
3Start recording.
At the same time that the original data is
recorded to an SxS memory card, proxy data
is saved to the automatically generated
\MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\MEMDISC\
<Proav-ID> folder (Proav-ID is an ID
specified in the DISCMETA.XML file on the
SxS memory card).
Proxy data: Saved in <Proav-ID>\Sub\
Recording Proxy Data
UDF
Recording Proxy Data While
Recording Clips
Recording Proxy Data
86
Chapter 4 Shooting
Metadata: Saved in <Proav-ID>\Clip\
To stop recording of proxy data
To stop recording of proxy data only, without
stopping recording of original data, set
MAINTENANCE >USB >Memory Rec in the
setup menu to [Disable].
If recording fails
The message “USB Memory Error” appears. If
recording fails because the USB flash drive is
full, the message “USB Memory Full” appears.
Proxy data is saved in this unit’s internal memory.
If recording fails because of a USB flash drive
defect or for some other reason, you can exchange
the USB flash drive or reconnect it, and rerecord
the proxy data saved in internal memory.
You can record proxy data for clips on SxS
memory cards to USB flash drives.
To record proxy data for all clips
1Set MAINTENANCE >USB >Memory
Rec in the setup menu to [Enable].
2Connect a USB flash drive formatted
with the FAT32 file system to the
external device connector (see page 73).
3Insert an SxS memory card with
recorded clips.
4Select MAINTENANCE >USB > Copy
All Clips in the setup menu, and press
the MENU knob.
5Turn the MENU knob to select
[Execute], and then press the knob.
Recording of the proxy data starts.
The message “Copy All Clips Done” appears
when recording finishes.
To cue up a clip and record its proxy data
1Set MAINTENANCE >USB >Memory
Rec in the setup menu to [Enable].
2Connect a USB flash drive formatted
with the FAT32 file system to the
external device connector (see page 73).
3Insert an SxS memory card with
recorded clips.
4Cue up the clip for which you want to
record proxy data.
5Select MAINTENANCE >USB > Copy
Current Clip in the setup menu, and
press the MENU knob.
6Turn the MENU knob to select
[Execute], and then press the knob.
Recording of the proxy data starts.
The message “Copy Current Clip Done”
appears when recording finishes.
You can delete all proxy data in the
\MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\MEMDISC folder by
deleting the folder.
1Set MAINTENANCE >USB >Memory
Rec in the setup menu to [Enable].
2Connect a USB flash drive containing
proxy data to the external device
connector.
3Select MAINTENANCE >USB > Del
All Memory Clips in the setup menu,
and press the MENU knob.
4Turn the MENU knob to select
[Execute], and then press the knob.
Deletion of the folder starts.
The message “Delete All Clips Done”
appears when the deletion finishes.
Recording Proxy Data for Existing
Clips
Deleting All Proxy Data from a
USB Flash Drive
Planning Metadata Operations 87
Chapter 4 Shooting
Planning metadata is information about shooting
and recording plans, recorded in an XML file.
Example of a planning metadata file
You can shoot using clip names and shot mark
names defined in advance in a planning metadata
file.
This unit can display clip names and shot mark
names defined in the following languages.
•English
• Chinese
•German
• French 1)
• Italian
• Spanish
•Dutch
1)
• Portuguese
•Swedish
•Norwegian
•Danish
•Finnish
1)
1) Some characters are displayed as different but similar
characters.
Note
If you define clip name and shot mark names in
languages other than the above, they may not be
displayed on the viewfinder screen or the LCD monitor
screen (with the display mode set to STATUS).
In the LCD monitor (with the display mode set to
STATUS), only alphanumeric characters and symbols
can be displayed.
To record planning metadata together with
recording clips, you need to load a planning
metadata file into the camcorder’s memory before
starting to shoot.
There are two ways to load files.
• Load a file that has been written to the following
directories on an SxS memory card or a USB
flash drive.
• When a Wi-Fi connection is made between the
camcorder and a computer, operate the Web
menu built in the camcorder from the computer
to transfer a file.
For details on how to use the Web menu to load
a planning metadata file, refer to the
Supplement supplied in the CD-ROM (labeled
“Manuals for Solid-State Memory
Camcorder”).
To load a planning metadata file by menu
operation
Do the following procedures with OPERAION
>Planning Metadata in the setup menu.
To load a file in an SxS memory card
1Insert an SxS memory card into the
memory card slot A or B, and set Load/
Slot(A) or Load/Slot(B) to [Execute].
A file list appears.
Note
The file list displays up to 64 files.
Even if the total number of planning metadata files
is 64 or less, all of the planning metadata files may
not appear if the directory where they are located on
the SxS memory card (General/Sony/Planning)
contains 512 or more files.
Planning Metadata
Operations
Loading a Planning Metadata File
into Camcorder’s Internal Memory
Recording
mode
Media Directory to which
files are written
FAT SxS memory
card
BPAV/General/Sony/
Planning
SDHC PRIVATE/SONY/
BPAV/General/Sony/
Planning
UDF SxS memory
card
General/Sony/Planning
USB flash
drive
Planning Metadata Operations
88
Chapter 4 Shooting
2Turn the MENU knob to select a file to
load and press the knob.
To load a file in a USB flash drive (in UDF mode)
1Connect a USB flash drive formatted
with the FAT32 file system to the
external device connector (see page 73).
A file list appears.
Note
The file list displays up to 64 files.
Even if the total number of planning metadata files
is 64 or less, all of the planning metadata files may
not appear if the directory where they are located on
the USB flash driver (General/Sony/Planning)
contains 512 or more files.
2Turn the MENU knob to select a file to
load and press the knob.
To display detailed information in
planning metadata
After loading planning metadata into this unit,
you can check the detailed information that it
contains, such as file names, date and time of
creation, and titles.
1Under OPERATION >Plan.Metadata
>Properties in the setup menu, select
[Execute].
2Turn the MENU knob to select
[Execute], and then press the knob.
The PLANNING METADATA
PROPERTIES list appears.
The list contains the following information.
a) Material group: A group of clips recorded with
the same planning metadata.
You can turn the MENU knob to scroll the
list.
After turning the MENU knob to select an
item, you can press the SET button to display
the selected item only.
To clear the planning metadata loaded
1Under OPERATION >Plan.Metadata
>Clear in the setup menu, select
[Execute].
2Turn the MENU knob to select
[Execute], and then press the knob.
Deletion of the file starts.
The message “Clear Planning Metadata File
OK” appears when the deletion finishes.
The following two types of clip name strings can
be written in a planning metadata file.
• The ASCII format name that appears in the
viewfinder
• The UTF-8 format name that is actually
registered as the clip name
You can select which type of clip name is
displayed with OPERAION >Planning Metadata
>Clip Name Disp in the setup menu.
Item Information
File Name File name
Assign ID Assign ID
Created Date and time of creation
Modified Date and time of most recent
modification
Modified by Name of person who
modified the file
Title Title1 specified in file (ASCII
format clip name)
Title2 Title2 specified in file (UTF-8
format clip name)
Material Gp Number of clips in material
group a)
Shot Mark0 to
Shot Mark9
Names defined in file for Shot
Mark 0 to Shot Mark 9
Defining Clip Names in Planning
Metadata
Planning Metadata Operations 89
Chapter 4 Shooting
When a clip name is set with planning metadata,
the name is displayed under the depth of field
indication on the viewfinder screen.
Note
When you define both of ASCII format name and UTF-
8 format name with planning metadata, the UTF-8
format string is used as the clip name string. If you define
either of ASCII format name and UTF-8 format name
with planning metadata, the defined format name is
displayed though it is not selected by menu setting.
Clip name string example
Use a text editor to modify the two fields in the
<Title> tag that contain the clip name strings.
The shaded fields in the example are clip name
strings. “Typhoon” is described in ASCII format
(up to 44 characters). “Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo”
is described in UTF-8 format (up to 44 bytes).
“sp” indicates a space and 3 indicates a carriage
return.
<?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding="
UTF-8"?>3
<PlanningMetadataspxmlns="http://
xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/
planningmetadata"spassignId="
P0001"spcreationDate="
2011-08-20T17:00:00+09:00"sp
lastUpdate="
2011-09-28T10:30:00+09:00"sp
version="1.00">3
<PropertiessppropertyId="
assignment"spupdate="
2011-09-28T10:30:00+09:00"sp
modifiedBy="Chris">3
<TitlespusAscii=" "sp
xml:lang="en">
</Title>3
</Properties>3
</PlanningMetadata>3
Notes
• When you create a file, enter each statement as a single
line with a CRLF only after the last character in the
statement line, and do not enter spaces except where
specified.
• Up to 44 bytes (or characters) string is available for the
clip name.
If the UTF-8 format string exceeds 44 bytes, 44 bytes
string is used as the clip name.
If only ASCII format name is specified, 44 characters
string is used as the clip name.
When neither an ASCII format name string nor UTF-8
format name string can be used, the standard format
clip name is used.
You can use the Sony Planning Metadata Add-in
application software supplied with the CBK-WA01
Wi-Fi Adapter to define clip names. For details, refer
to the Operating Instructions supplied with the CBK-
WA01.
To set clip names
1Load a planning metadata file that
contains clip names into this
camcorder.
2Set OPERATION >Clip >Auto Naming
in the setup menu to [Plan].
Each time that you record a clip, the unit
automatically generates a name consisting of
the clip name defined in the planning
metadata file, with the addition of an
underbar (_) and a five-digit serial number
(00001 to 99999).
Examples:
Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00001,
Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00002, ...
Note
When you load another planning metadata file, the serial
number returns to 00001 with the next recording
operation.
To select the clip name display format
When names are defined in both ASCII format
and UTF-8 format, you can use OPERATION
>Clip >Clip Name Disp in the setup menu to
select which of the names to display on the LCD
monitor and on the viewfinder screen.
To display ASCII format names: Select
Title1(ASCII).
The clip name becomes
“Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_SerialNumber”,
but “Typhoon_SerialNumber” is displayed
on the screens.
To display UTF-8 format names: Select
Title2(UTF-8).
The clip name becomes
“Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_SerialNumber”,
and the same name is displayed on the
screens.
Typhoon
Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo
Planning Metadata Operations
90
Chapter 4 Shooting
When you use planning metadata to set shot
marks, you can define names for Shot Mark 0 to
Shot Mark 9. When you record shot marks, you
can add the shot mark name strings defined in the
planning metadata.
Note
Shot Mark 1 and Shot Mark 2 can be recorded on the
camcorder. Shot Mark 3 to Shot Mark 9 and Shot Mark
0 can be recorded by operation from a computer which is
connected with the camcorder via Wi-Fi.
Shot mark name string example
Use a text editor to modify the fields in the < Meta
name> tag.
The shaded fields in the example are essence
mark name strings. Names can be either in ASCII
format (up to 32 characters) or UTF-8 format (up
to 16 characters).
“sp” indicates a space and 3 indicates a carriage
return.
Note
If a name string contains even one non-ASCII character,
the maximum length of that string is 16 characters.
<?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding="
UTF-8"?>3
<PlanningMetadata xmlns="http://
xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/
planningmetadata"spassignId="
H00123"spcreationDate="
2011-04-15T08:00:00Z"splastUpdate="
2011-04-15T15:00:00Z"spversion=
"1.00">3
<PropertiessppropertyId=
"assignment"spclass="original"sp
update="2011-04-15T15:00:00Z"sp
modifiedBy="Chris">3
<TitlespusAscii="Football
Game"spxml:lang="en">
Football Game 15/04/2011</
Title>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark1"sp
content=" "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark2"sp
content=" "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark3"sp
content=" "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark4"sp
content=" "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark5"sp
content=" "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark6"sp
content=" "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark7"sp
content=" "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark8"sp
content=" "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark9"sp
content=" "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark0"sp
content=" "/>3
</Properties>3
</PlanningMetadata>3
Note
When you create a definition file, enter each statement as
a single line with a CRLF only after the last character in
the statement line, and do not enter spaces except where
specified, except within essence mark name strings.
You can use the Sony Planning Metadata Add-in
application software supplied with the CBK-WA01
Wi-Fi Adapter to Essence mark names. For details,
refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with the
CBK-WA01.
Defining Shot Mark Names in
Planning Metadata
Goal
Shoot
Corner Kick
Free Kick
Goal Kick
Foul
PK
1st Half
2nd Half
Kick Off
Clip Playback 91
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
A thumbnail screen appears if you press the THUMBNAIL button in E-E or playback mode. Thumbnail
screens display lists of the clips stored on SxS memory cards in the form of index pictures. (A message
appears if you insert a memory card that contains no clips.)
You can select any clip (see page 94) in a thumbnail screen and start playback of that clip (see page 94).
In thumbnail screens, the timecode of the index picture appears beneath the thumbnail for each clip. (An
OK, NG or KP mark also appears when a clip has been marked with an OK, NG or KP mark.)
Note
Normal thumbnail screens display SD clips only or HD clips only, even if the SxS memory card contains clips in both
formats. You can select the format to display by selecting a mode with OPERATION >Format >HD/SD (see page 112)
in the setup menu.
If you want to display all recorded clips, regardless of the HD/SD mode, switch to the all clips thumbnail screen.
However, it is not possible to start playback from the all clips thumbnail screen (see page 99).
Chapter5Clip Operations
Clip Playback
Thumbnail Screen
Clip Playback
92
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
UDF mode/FAT-HD mode thumbnail screen
aIndex picture
When a clip is recorded, its first frame is set
automatically as the index picture. You can
change to index picture to any frame (see
page 106).
bLock mark
Indicates the selected clip is marked with an OK
mark or protected.
cDate and start time of recording
dClip name
eIndependent AV file icon
This appears only when a clip is an independent
AV file. SxS memory cards may contain
independent files that have been added directly
from a computer. Because independent files lack
the associated management files, some operations
and information displays may not be available.
fVideo format of recording
gSpecial recording information
This displays the mode of clips that have been
recorded in a special mode (Slow & Quick
Motion, Interval Rec, Frame Rec).
For Slow & Quick Motion clips, the frame rates
are displayed to the right as [Recording frame
rate/Playback frame rate] fps.
hOK/NG/KP mark
When the recording mode is UDF, an OK, NG, or
KP mark appears if the clip has been marked with
an OK, NG or KP mark (see page 101).
When the recording mode is FAT, an OK mark
appears only if the clip has been marked with an
OK mark (see page 101).
iFile format
Indicates the file format of the selected clip (MXF
or MP4).
(This item is not indicated when the recording
mode is UDF-HD mode.)
UDF / FAT-HD
Clip number/Number of clips
Cursor (yellow) The icon of the currently selected SxS memory card is highlighted.
(If the card is write protected, a lock appears on the left.)
Clip Playback 93
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
jClip duration
kTimecode
This is the timecode of the index picture.
FAT-SD mode thumbnail screen
aTake mark
Indicates that the file size is larger than 2 GB, and
that the clip has been split before being saved.
You can check the segment files on the expand
thumbnail screen (see page 104).
bIndex picture
When a clip is recorded, its first frame is set
automatically as the index picture.
cDate and start time of recording
dClip name/Number of components
The number after the clip name (delimited by /) is
the number of components. This appears only for
clips larger than 2 GB in size, which have been
split into smaller files for storage.
eVideo format of recording
fFile format
Indicates the file format of the selected clip
(AVI).
gClip duration
hTimecode
This is the timecode of the index picture.
To switch between SxS memory cards
When two SxS memory cards are loaded, you can
switch between them by pressing the SLOT
SELECT button.
Note
While an expand thumbnail screen (see page 104) or an
essence mark thumbnail screen (see page 105) is
displayed, SxS memory cards cannot be switched.
FAT-SD
Clip number/Number of components
Cursor (yellow)
The icon of the currently selected SxS memory card is highlighted.
(If the card is write protected, a lock appears on the left.)
Clip Playback
94
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
To hide the thumbnail screen
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
To select clip thumbnails
Do one of the following to move the yellow
cursor to the clip that you want to select.
• Press an arrow button (J, j, K, k).
• Turn the MENU knob.
• Press the PREV or NEXT button.
To select the first thumbnail
With the F REV button held down, press the
PREV button.
To select the last thumbnail
With the F FWD button held down, press the
NEXT button.
To play clips sequentially starting from a
selected clip
1Select the thumbnail of the clip that you
want to play first.
2Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
Play begins from the top of the selected clip.
Play continues through all clips after the selected
clip.
When the last clip has been played to the end, the
camcorder enters pause (still image) mode at the
last frame of the last clip.
Press the THUMBNAIL button to return to the
thumbnail screen.
Notes
• There may be momentary picture breakup or still
image display at the transition from one clip to another.
During this time, the play controls and the
THUMBNAIL button cannot be operated.
• When you select a clip in the thumbnail screen and
begin playback, there may be momentary picture
breakup at the top of the clip. To view the top of the
clip without breakup, put the camcorder into playback
mode, pause, use the PREV button to return to the top
of the clip, and start play again.
• On SxS memory cards that contain both HD-mode and
SD-mode clips, you cannot play all clips in sequence.
For example, while an HD mode thumbnail screen is
displayed, only HD mode clips are played in sequence.
To pause play
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes while play
is paused.
Press the button again to return to play mode.
To play at high speed
Press the F FWD button (see page 21) or the
F REV button (see page 21).
To return to normal playback, press the PLAY/
PAUSE button.
To stop play
Press the STOP button: Play stops and the
camcorder enters E-E mode.
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Play stops and
the thumbnail screen (see page 91) appears
in the viewfinder.
Play also stops if you eject the memory card. In
this case, the camera picture appears in the
viewfinder.
To cue up clips
To return to the top of the current clip
Press the PREV button.
• During playback or F FWD, this jumps to the
top of the current clip and starts play.
• During F REV or pause, this jumps to the top of
the current clip and displays a still image.
• Each subsequent press of the button moves to
the previous clip.
To play from the top of the first clip
Simultaneously press the PREV and F REV
buttons. This jumps to the top of the first clip on
the SxS memory card.
To jump to the top of the next clip
Press the NEXT button.
• During playback or F FWD, this jumps to the
top of the next clip and starts play.
• During F REV or pause, this jumps to the top of
the next clip and displays a still image.
• Each subsequent press of the button moves to
the next clip.
To play from the top of the last clip
Simultaneously press the NEXT and F FWD
buttons. This jumps to the top of the last clip on
the SxS memory card.
Playing Clips
Clip Playback 95
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
To add a shot mark during play
You can add shot marks to clips during play by
using the same method used during recording (see
page 77).
Notes
• Shot marks cannot be recorded when the SxS memory
card is write protected.
• Shot marks cannot be added at the first frame of each
clip or last frame of the last clip.
You can switch a thumbnail screen to the
following thumbnail search screens, which allow
you quickly find the clips you want.
• Expand thumbnail screen
• Essence mark thumbnail screen (in HD mode
only)
Like the normal thumbnail screen and the OK clip
thumbnail screen, these screens allow you to
select clip thumbnails (see page 94) and to start
clip playback (see page 94).
To search for scenes in clips with the
expand thumbnail screen
The expand thumbnail screen is convenient when
you want to find and cue up a specific scene in a
long clip.
To display the expand thumbnail screen, select a
clip in the thumbnail screen and press the DISP
SEL/EXPAND button (see page 21) or select
THUMBNAIL >Thumbnail View >Forward
Expansion in the setup menu. The selected clip is
displayed as follows.
HD mode: The clip is divided into 12 equally-
sized blocks, and a thumbnail of the first
frame in each block is displayed.
SD mode: Only in the case of clips that have been
split into partial files because the file size was
larger than 2 GB, a thumbnail of the first
frame of each partial file is displayed.
This helps you to quickly cue up to a desired
scene in a clip of long duration.
See “Displaying the Expand Thumbnail Screen”
(page 104) for more information about the expand
thumbnail screen.
To search for essence marks in clips with
the essence mark thumbnail screen
When a clip contains one or more essence marks,
you can easily find them with the essence mark
thumbnail screen. The essence mark thumbnail
screen displays a thumbnail of each essence mark
frame in the clip.
To display the essence mark thumbnail screen,
press the ESSENCE MARK button (see page 23)
or select THUMBNAIL >Thumbnail View >
Essence Mark Thumbnail in the setup menu.
See “Displaying the Essence Mark Thumbnail
Screen” (page 105) for more information about the
essence mark thumbnail screen.
HD
Using Thumbnails to Search
Inside Clips
UDF / FAT-HD
Thumbnail Operations
96
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
You can use the THUMBNAIL menu to perform various operations on clips, to check clip properties, and
to change clip metadata.
Thumbnail Operations
THUMBNAIL Menu Configuration
Menu items Sub-items Description
Clip Properties — Displays detailed properties (see page 100).
Set Index Picture — Changes index pictures in the expand thumbnail screen or
the essence mark thumbnail screen (see page 106).
Thumbnail View Forward Expansion • Displays the expand thumbnail screen (see page 104).
• In the expand thumbnail screen, increases the number of
divisions (see page 105).
Back Expansion In the expand thumbnail screen, decreases the number of
divisions.
Essence Mark Thumbnail Displays the essence mark thumbnail screen (see
page 105).
Clip Thumbnail Displays the normal thumbnail screen.
All Clip Thumbnail Displays the all clips thumbnail screen (see page 99).
Set Shot Mark Add Shot Mark1 In the expand thumbnail screen or the essence mark
thumbnail screen, adds a Shot Mark1 mark (see page 106).
Delete Shot Mark1 In the expand thumbnail screen or the essence mark
thumbnail screen, deletes a Shot Mark1 mark (see
page 106).
Add Shot Mark2 In the expand thumbnail screen or the essence mark
thumbnail screen, adds a Shot Mark2 mark (see page 106).
Delete Shot Mark2 In the expand thumbnail screen or the essence mark
thumbnail screen, deletes a Shot Mark2 mark (see
page 106).
Set Clip Flag OK Adds an OK mark.
NG Adds an NG mark.
KP(Keep) Adds a KP mark.
None Deletes an OK, an NG or a KP mark.
Add OK Mark — Adds an OK mark and protects a clip (see page 101).
Delete OK Mark — Deletes an OK mark and unprotects a clip (see page 101).
Lock Clip — Protects a clip.
Unlock Clip — Cancels protection of a clip.
UDF / FAT-HD
UDF / FAT-HD
UDF / FAT-HD
UDF
FAT-HD
FAT-HD
UDF
UDF
Thumbnail Operations 97
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
Copy Clip — Copies a clip (see page 102).
Delete Clip — Deletes a clip (see page 103).
Divide Clip — Divides a clip (see page 106).
Filter Clips — Displays the OK clip thumbnail screen (see page 98).
Filter Clips OK Displays the OK clip thumbnail screen.
NG Displays the NG clip thumbnail screen.
KP(Keep) Displays the KP clip thumbnail screen.
None Displays the None clip (clip which have been marked with
an OK, NG, or KP mark) thumbnail screen.
Lock All Clips — Protects all clips displayed.
Unlock All Clips — Cancels protection of all clips displayed.
Copy All All Clips Batch copies groups of clips/files (see page 103).
General Files
All Clips & General Files
Delete All Clips Execute/Cancel Deletes all unprotected clips (see page 103).
Menu items Sub-items Description
FAT-HD
FAT-HD
UDF
UDF
UDF
Thumbnail Operations
98
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 109) for
information about menu operations.
To display the THUMBNAIL menu
1Press the THUMBNAIL button to
display the thumbnail screen.
2Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON,
or press the MENU button.
3Turn the MENU knob to select “TH”,
and then press the knob. Or press the J
or j button to select “TH”, and then
press the SET button.
The THUMBNAIL menu appears.
in FAT mode
in UDF mode
To hide the THUMBNAIL menu, press the
MENU button again.
To select menu items and sub-items
Do one of the following.
• Turn the MENU knob to select an item or sub-
item, and then press the knob.
• Press the arrow buttons (J, j, K, k) to
select an item or sub-item, and then press the
SET button.
According to the selected item or sub-item, a
selection list or a clip properties screen appears
(see page 100).
To return to the previous state, push the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the
ESCAPE side.
Notes
• When an SxS memory card is write protected, it is not
possible to copy, delete, or divide clips, to change
index pictures, or to add and delete OK/NG/KP marks
and shot marks.
• Some items cannot be selected, depending on the state
of the camcorder when the menu was displayed.
To hide the clip properties screen
Do one of the following.
Press the RESET/RETURN button: This
returns to the THUMBNAIL menu.
Press the THUMBNAIL button: The
camcorder enters E-E mode, and the camera
picture appears.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button: Playback from
the selected clip starts.
To display OK/NG/KP/None clip
thumbnails
When the recording mode is UDF, from among
all clips stored on the currently selected SxS
memory card, only clips which have been marked
with a OK, NG or KP mark can be displayed, or
only clips with no marks (None clips) can be
displayed.
When the recording mode is FAT, from among all
clips stored on the currently selected SxS memory
card, only clips which have been marked with an
OK mark can be displayed.
When the normal thumbnail screen is displayed,
you can select THUMBNAIL >Filter Clips to
switch to the screen.
In FAT-HD mode: Switched to the OK clip
thumbnail screen.
In UDF mode: By selecting one of OK, NG, KP
(Keep) and None in the setting area, you can
display the thumbnail screen containing only
clips which have been marked with the
selected mark or only clips which have been
marked with no marks (None clips).
Basic THUMBNAIL Menu
Operations
FAT
UDF
Changing the Thumbnail Screen
Type
Thumbnail Operations 99
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
See “Adding and Deleting OK, NG or KP Marks”
(page 101) for information about how to add OK
marks.
To display the all clips thumbnail screen
The all clips thumbnail screen displays
thumbnails of all of the clips on the selected
memory card, including both HD-mode and
SD-mode clips. This is useful when you want to
check whether the memory card contains clips in
another mode.
You can switch to the all clips thumbnail screen
by selecting THUMBNAIL >All Clip Thumbnail
in the setup menu in the normal thumbnails
screen.
Pressing the RESET/RETURN button returns
you to the normal thumbnails screen, where you
can perform playback and other clip operations.
Note
You cannot start playback from the all clips thumbnail
screen.
Thumbnail Operations
100
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
The clip properties screen appears when you select Clip Properties in the THUMBNAIL menu.
aImage of the current clip
bImage of the previous clip
Press the PREV button to display the properties of
the previous clip.
cImage of the next clip
Press the NEXT button to display the properties
of the next clip.
dClip name
In SD mode, only for clips that have been divided
because the file size was greater than 2 GB, the
number of component clips appears after the clip
name.
When clip names are 12 characters or longer, only
the first five characters and the last five characters
are displayed. If you want to check the
abbreviated characters, press the MENU knob to
switch to long display mode. In long display
mode, up to 53 characters are displayed in clip
names.
Displaying Clip Properties
UDF / FAT-HD
FAT-SD
Thumbnail Operations 101
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
Press the MENU knob again to exit long display
mode. Pressing the PREV or NEXT button to
display the previous or next clip also exists long
display mode.
eLock mark
This appears when the clip is marked with an OK
mark or protected.
fOK/NG/KP mark
This appears only when an OK/NG/KP mark has
been added.
gDate and start time of recording
hFile format
The file format of the clip (MXF, MP4 or AVI)
appears.
iSpecial recording information
This displays the mode of clips that have been
recorded in a special mode (Slow & Quick
Motion, Interval Rec, Frame Rec).
For Slow & Quick Motion clips, the frame rates
are displayed to the right as [Recording frame
rate/Playback frame rate].
jTimecode of the displayed image
kTimecode of the recording start point
lTimecode of the recording end point
mDuration
nRecorded audio channels
oVideo format of recording
You can add OK, NG or KP marks to clips. This
makes it possible to display thumbnails of only
the clips that you need by pressing the
THUMBNAIL button.
When the recording mode is FAT, clips with OK
marks cannot be deleted or divided (protected). If
you want to delete or divide such a clip, delete the
OK mark.
To add an OK mark
1In the thumbnail screen, select
THUMBNAIL >Add OK Mark.
The screen changes to the clip properties
screen, and a confirmation message appears
beneath the index picture.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
An OK mark is added to the selected clip.
You can use an assignable switch to which Clip
Flag OK is assigned to add OK marks.
To add an OK, NG or KP mark
1In the thumbnail screen, select
THUMBNAIL >Set Clip Flag.
2Select one of OK, NG or KP in the
setting area.
3Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
The mark selected in step 2 is added to the
selected clip.
You can use assignable switches to which Clip
Flag OK, Clip Flag NG and Clip Flag Keep are
assigned to add OK, NG and KP marks.
To delete an OK mark
A Delete OK Mark item appears in the
THUMBNAIL menu when you have selected a
clip that has an OK mark.
1In the thumbnail screen, select
THUMBNAIL >Delete OK Mark.
The screen changes to the clip properties
screen, and a confirmation message appears
beneath the index picture.
Adding and Deleting OK, NG or
KP Marks
UDF / FAT-HD
FAT-HD
UDF
FAT-HD
Thumbnail Operations
102
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
The OK mark is deleted from the selected
clip.
To delete an OK, NG or KP mark
1In the thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnail of the clip from which you
want to delete an OK, NG or KP mark,
and select THUMBNAIL >Set Clip Flag
>None.
The screen changes to the clip properties
screen, and a confirmation message appears
beneath the index picture.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
The mark selected in step 2 is added to the
selected clip.
When the recording mode is UDF, you can
protect a selected clip or all clips. Protected clips
cannot be deleted or divided.
To protect a clip
1In the thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnail of the clip which you want to
protect, and select THUMBNAIL
>Lock Clip.
The screen changes to the clip properties
screen, and a confirmation message appears
beneath the index picture.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
The selected clip is protected.
To protect all clips
1In the thumbnail screen, select
THUMBNAIL >Lock All Clips.
A confirmation message appears beneath the
index picture.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
All clips are protected.
To cancel protection of a clip
1In the thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnail of the clip which you want to
unprotect, and select THUMBNAIL
>Unlock Clip.
The screen changes to the clip properties
screen, and a confirmation message appears
beneath the index picture.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
The selected clip is unprotected.
To cancel protection of all clips
1In the thumbnail screen, select
THUMBNAIL >Unlock All Clip.
A confirmation message appears beneath the
index picture.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
All clips are unprotected.
You can copy clips to other SxS memory cards.
Clips are copied to destination SxS memory cards
using the same names as the original clips.
Notes
• If a clip with the same name already exists at the copy
destination SxS memory card, a one-digit number in
parentheses is added to the original name.
The number in parentheses is the smallest number that
does not exist at the copy destination.
Examples:
ABCD0002tABCD0002(1)
ABCD0002(1)tABCD0002(2)
ABCD0005(3)tABCD0005(4)
• If the parenthetical numbers (1) to (9) already exist at
the copy destination, it is not possible to copy any more
clips under that name. (A tenth clip cannot be copied.)
UDF
Protecting Clips
UDF
Copying Clips
Thumbnail Operations 103
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
• A message appears if there is not enough free capacity
at the copy destination SxS memory card. Exchange
the card for one with more free capacity.
• When multiple clips are recorded in a source SxS
memory card, it may not be possible to copy all clips
to the end. Depending on memory characteristics and
usage of the memory cards, this can occur even when
the source and destination memory cards have the
same capacity.
1In the thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnail of the clip to copy, and then
select THUMBNAIL >Copy Clip.
The screen changes to the properties screen
of that clip, and a confirmation message
appears beneath the index picture.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
The copy starts.
During the copy, an execution message and
progress bar are displayed.
When the copy finishes, the display returns to the
thumbnail screen.
To cancel a copy operation
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
The copy is cancelled, and the display returns to
the thumbnail screen.
To batch copy groups of clips/files
You can batch copy groups of clips from one SxS
memory card to another SxS memory card.
When both HD-mode and SD-mode clips exist on
the source SxS memory card, only clips in the
currently selected mode are copied. This is a
convenient way to extract clips in one of the
modes.
You can also copy of the files in the General
directory, either together with or separately from
clips.
1In the thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnails of the clips to copy and then
select THUMBNAIL >Copy All >All
Clips.
The confirmation message “Copy All Clip?”
appears.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
The copy starts.
During the copy, the progress of the copy is
displayed.
If you executed the copy in HD mode, only
HD-mode clips are copied.
If you executed the copy in SD mode, only
SD-mode clips are copied.
To cancel the copy operation
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
When the copy finishes
A completion message appears, and the
THUMBNAIL menu screen appears again.
To copy all files in the General directory
To copy all files only, without copying clips,
select THUMBNAIL >Copy All >General Files
in step 1.
To copy all files together with all clips, select
THUMBNAIL >Copy All >All Clips & General
Files in step 1.
You can delete clips from SxS memory cards.
Note
HD clips with OK marks cannot be deleted.
If you want to delete such clips, first delete the OK marks
(see page 101).
1In the thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnail of the clip to delete, and then
select THUMBNAIL >Delete Clip.
The screen changes to the properties screen
of that clip, and a confirmation message
appears beneath the index picture.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
The clip is deleted.
In the thumbnail screen, the clips that followed
the deleted clip move up one position.
To batch delete groups of clips
You can batch delete groups of clips from an SxS
memory card.
Notes
• When both HD-mode and SD-mode clips exist on the
SxS memory card, only clips in the currently selected
mode are deleted.
Deleting Clips
Thumbnail Operations
104
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
• In HD mode, clips with OK marks are not deleted,
even when a deletion is executed for a group of clips
that includes them.
1In the thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnails of the clips to delete and
then select THUMBNAIL >Delete All
Clips.
The confirmation message “Delete All
Clips?” appears.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
The deletion starts.
During the deletion, the progress of the
deletion is displayed.
If you executed the deletion in HD mode,
only HD-mode clips are deleted.
If you executed the deletion in SD mode,
only SD-mode clips are deleted.
To cancel the deletion
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
When the deletion finishes
A completion message appears, and the
THUMBNAIL menu screen appears again.
The expand thumbnail screen allows you to
search inside clips by using thumbnails (see
page 95), to change index pictures (see
page 106), and to add and delete shot marks (see
page 106).
To display the screen
In the thumbnail screen, select a thumbnail and
press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button (see
page 21) or select THUMBNAIL >Thumbnail
View >Forward Expansion.
An expand thumbnail screen for the selected clip
appears.
Expand thumbnail screen in UDF/FAT-HD
mode
In UDF mode or FAT-HD mode, the selected clip
is divided into 12 equally-sized blocks, and a
thumbnail of the first frame in each block is
displayed.
Clip properties are shown at the bottom of the
screen.
Except for the items listed below, the information
displayed here is the same as the information
displayed in the normal thumbnail screen.
aFrame information
This displays frame information using icons.
The same icons are also displayed beneath the
thumbnails. However, when several icons could
be displayed for the same frame, one icon is
selected for display, in the order of priority Index
picture > Shot Mark1 > Shot Mark2.
bTimecode
This displays the timecode of the selected frame
in the expand thumbnail screen.
Expand thumbnail screen in FAT-SD
mode
In FAT-SD mode, only in the case of clips that
have been split into partial files because the file
size was larger than 2 GB, a thumbnail of the first
frame of each partial file is displayed.
Displaying the Expand Thumbnail
Screen
UDF / FAT-HD
Index picture
Frame with Shot Mark1
Frame with Shot Mark2
FAT-SD
S1S2
S2S1
Number of the selected frame
S1
S2
Thumbnail Operations 105
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
Clip properties are displayed at the bottom of the
screen.
Except for the items listed below, the information
displayed here is the same as the information
displayed in the normal thumbnail screen.
aTimecode
This is the timecode of the selected partial file.
bDuration
This is the duration of the selected partial file.
To increase the number of divisions
When you press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button,
or select THUMBNAIL >Thumbnail View
>Forward Expansion, the divided clip or file is
further divided into 12 equally-sized blocks (a
clip or file that has been divided into 12 is further
divided into 12, for 12 × 12 = 144 divisions). You
can repeat the same operation to increase the
number of division.
To return to the previous division level
Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button with the
SHIFT button held down, or select
THUMBNAIL >Thumbnail View >Back
Expansion. The expand thumbnail screen returns
to the previous division level.
In the essence mark thumbnail screen (shown
only in HD mode), you can search for shot marks
in clips (see page 95), change index pictures (see
page 106), and add and delete shot marks (see
page 106).
1In the thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnail of a clip, and press the
ESSENCE MARK button (see page 23)
or select THUMBNAIL >Thumbnail
View >Essence Mark Thumbnail.
The essence mark thumbnail screen appears,
and a selection list is displayed.
2Select the type of the essence mark
thumbnail screen
All: Display all frames marked with essence
marks.
Rec Start: Display frames marked with Rec
Start marks and of the first frames of
clips when the first frames are not
marked with Rec Start marks (In UDF
mode only).
Shot Mark1: Display only frames marked
with Shot Mark1 marks.
Shot Mark2: Display only frames marked
with Shot Mark2 marks.
You can also select Shot Mark 0 and Shot
Mark 3 to Shot Mark 9.
If you have recorded clips by using planning
metadata that defined names for Shot Mark 0
to Shot Mark 9, the defined names are
displayed instead of the above item names in
the list.
Example shot mark thumbnail screen
(with Shot Mark1 selected)
The properties of the clip appear at the bottom of
the screen.
Except for the following item, the information
displayed here is the same as the information
displayed in the expand thumbnail screen.
Displaying the Essence Mark
Thumbnail Screen
UDF / FAT-HD
Number of the selected frame
S1S S2S1
S1S1
Thumbnail Operations
106
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
aTimecode
This is the timecode of the selected frame in the
shot mark thumbnail screen.
In the essence mark thumbnail screen (see
page 105) or the expand thumbnail screen (see
page 104), you can add thumbnails to any frame
of clips recorded in HD mode, and delete
recorded shot marks.
To add shot marks
1Select the frame where you want to add
a shot mark, and then select
THUMBNAIL > Set Shot Mark > Add
Shot Mark1 (or Add Shot Mark2).
The properties screen of the selected frame
appears, and a confirmation message appears
below the image.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
To delete shot marks
1Select the frame where you want to
delete a shot mark, and then select
THUMBNAIL > Set Shot Mark >
Delete Shot Mark1 (or Delete Shot
Mark2).
The properties screen of the selected frame
appears, and a confirmation message appears
below the image.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
In the essence mark thumbnail screen (see
page 105) or the expand thumbnail screen (see
page 104), you can set the selected frame of the
clip recorded in UDF/FAT-HD mode as the index
picture.
1Select the thumbnail of the frame that
you want to use as the index picture,
and then select THUMBNAIL >Set
Index Picture.
The properties screen of the selected frame
appears, and a confirmation message appears
below the image.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
Note
Even if you set the index picture to a frame that is not the
first frame of a clip, playback of that clip from a
thumbnail screen always begins at the first frame.
In the expand thumbnail screen (see page 104)
and the essence mark thumbnail screen (see
page 105), clips recorded in FAT-HD mode can
be divided into two clips at the selected frame.
1Select the thumbnail of the frame where
you want to divide the clip, and then
select THUMBNAIL >Divide Clip.
The properties screen of the selected frame
appears, and a confirmation message appears
below the image.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
The clip is divided at the selected frame, and
two clips with different names are created.
The first four characters of the clip name are
taken from the name of the original clips, and the
last four characters are new serial numbers.
Example: When the name of a newly recorded
clip would be EFGH0100, and a clip named
ABCD0002 is divided, the names of the two
newly created clips are ABCD0100 and
ABCD0101.
Note
When there is not enough remaining capacity on the SxS
memory cards to store the divided clips, a message
appears to inform you that there is not enough capacity.
Adding and Deleting Shot Marks
UDF / FAT-HD
Changing Clip Index Pictures
UDF / FAT-HD
Dividing Clips
FAT-HD
Setup Menu Organization and Levels 107
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
On this camcorder, settings for shooting and
playback are made in the setup menu, which
appears in the viewfinder.
The setup menu can also be displayed on an
external video monitor (see page 167).
The setup menu consists of the following menus.
Us: USER menu
Menu items added in any order from other menus
(see page 111)
Op: OPERATION menu
Settings related to shooting, except settings
related to picture quality (see page 112)
Pa: PAINT menu
Settings related to picture quality (see page 129)
Th: THUMBNAIL menu
Settings related to clip thumbnails (see page 96)
Note
The THUMBNAIL menu is used only when a thumbnail
screen (see page 91) is displayed. It is disabled when no
thumbnail screen is displayed.
Ma: MAINTENANCE menu
Settings related to audio and timecode (see
page 135)
Fi: FILE menu
Settings related to file operations (see page 150)
See “THUMBNAIL Menu Configuration” (page 96)
for the organization of the THUMBNAIL menu.
USER menu (see page 111)
OPERATION Menu (see page 112)
Chapter6
Menu and Detailed Settings
Setup Menu
Organization and Levels
Setup Menu Organization
Setup Menu Levels
USER
Format Media
Rec Function
Input/Output
Clip
Assignable SW
Camera Config
OPERATION
Format
Format Media
Input/Output
Super Impose
LCD
Rec Function
Assignable SW
VF Setting
Marker
Gain Switch
TLCS
Zebra
Display On/Off
“!” LED
Auto Iris
Shot ID
Shot Display
White Setting
Offset White
Shutter
Time Zone
Clip
Plan.Metadata
USB
Setup Menu Organization and Levels
108
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
PAINT Menu (see page 129)
MAINTENANCE Menu (see page 135)
FILE Menu (see page 150)
PAINT
Switch Status
White
Black
Flare
Gamma
Black Gamma
Knee
White Clip
Detail(HD Mode)
Detail(SD Mode)
Aperture
Skin Detail
Matrix
Multi Matrix
V Modulation
Low Key Saturation
Noise Suppress
MAINTENANCE
White Shading
Black Shading
Battery
Audio
WRR Setting
Timecode
Essence Mark
Camera Config
Preset White
White Filter
DCC Adjust
Auto Iris2
Genlock
ND Comp
Lens
Auto Shading
APR
Trigger Mode
Network Setting
Wi-Fi Setting
Clock set
Language
Hours Meter
Ver sion
FILE
User
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Basic Setup Menu Operations 109
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
To display the setup menu
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON, or press
the MENU button.
The camcorder enters menu mode and the menu
list appears on the screen.
A cursor appears over the first two characters of the
most recently used menu, and the corresponding
menu item selection area appears to the right.
Example: When the cursor is positioned at the
OPERATION menu
Note
The setup menu cannot be used when the camcorder is in
focus magnification mode. Exit focus magnification
mode by pressing the assignable switch to which the
Focus Mag function has been assigned.
To make menu settings
1Turn the MENU knob, or press the J or
j button, to move the cursor to the item
that you want to set.
A list of selectable menu items appears in the
menu item selection area to the right of the
icon.
2Press the MENU knob or the SET
button.
The cursor moves to the menu item selection
area.
You can also move the cursor to the menu
item selection area by pressing the k
button.
• The menu item selection area displays a
maximum of seven lines. You can scroll
through menus with more than seven lines
by moving the cursor up and down.
Triangles appear at the upper right and
lower right of the menu item selection area
to indicate that a menu is scrollable.
3Turn the MENU knob, or press the J or
j button, to move the cursor to the item
that you want to set, and then confirm
by pressing the MENU knob or the SET
button.
The sub-items area appears to the right of the
menu item selection area, and the cursor
moves to the first sub-item.
Basic Setup Menu
Operations
Menu item selection area
Menu list
Appears when more menu items
are available below the last line.
(vappears when more menu items
are available above the first line.)
Menu item selection area
•B appears to the right when more detailed
sub-items are available.
•Settings appear to the right when a menu
item has no sub-items.
•You can select to return to the
previous level.
Sub-items area
• Displays sub-items and their current
settings
• To return to the previous level, select
press the K button, or push the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to
the ESCAPE side.
Basic Setup Menu Operations
110
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
4Turn the MENU knob, or press the J or
j button, to move the cursor to the sub-
item that you want to set, and then
confirm the selection by pressing the
MENU knob or the SET button.
The settings of the selected sub-item appear,
and the cursor moves to the currently
selected value.
• The settings area displays a maximum of
seven lines. You can scroll through menus
with more than seven sub-items by moving
the cursor up and down. Triangles appear at
the upper right and lower right of the
settings area to indicate that a sub-item
menu is scrollable.
• For sub-items with a large settings range
(for example, –99 to +99), the settings area
is not displayed. Instead, the sub-item name
is highlighted to indicate that the sub-item
can be set.
5Turn the MENU knob, or press the J or
j button, to select the value to set, and
then confirm by pressing the MENU
knob or the SET button.
The setting is changed, and the display is
updated to show the new setting.
If you select [Execute] for an executable
item, the corresponding function is executed.
Items that require confirmation before execution
In step 3, the menu disappears and a confirmation
message appears if you select an item that
requires confirmation before execution. Follow
the instructions in the message to execute or
cancel the operation.
To enter text
Some items, such as time data or file names, must
be set by entering text. When you select one of
these items, the text entry area is highlighted, with
“SET” displayed to the right.
1Turn the MENU knob, or press the J or
j button, to select a character, and then
confirm by pressing the MENU knob or
the SET button.
The cursor moves to the next position.
To return to the previous position, push the
MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch
down to the ESCAPE side.
2Select characters for all positions up to
the last.
The cursor moves to “SET”.
3Press the MENU knob or the SET
button.
This confirms the setting.
To cancel the setting change
Push the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch down to the ESCAPE side.
To reset a setting to the initial value
1Before a setting is changed or after a
setting change is cancelled, push the
MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch up to the CANCEL/PRST side.
2When the message to confirm whether
the current setting is reset to the initial
value, push the MENU CANCEL/
PRST/ESCAPE switch up to the
CANCEL/PRST side again.
The current setting is reset to the initial value.
To exit the menu
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or press
the MENU button.
The normal camera picture reappears.
Settings area
Menu List 111
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
The USER menu consists of the following items when it is in the factory default state.
• Format Media (see page 113)
• Input/Output (see page 114)
• Rec Function (see page 116)
• Assignable Sw1) (see page 117)
•Clip (see page 125)
• Camera Config2) (see page 142)
1) Excluding sub-item <0>
2) Contains only User Menu Only as sub-item
You can change the configuration of the USER menu by adding desired menu items and arranging them
in a desired order.
For details, refer to the Supplement supplied in the CD-ROM (labeled “Manuals for Solid-State Memory
Camcorder”).
Menu List
USER Menu (Factory Default Configuration)
Menu List
112
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Settings in bold are the factory default values.
OPERATION Menu
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Format
Specifies the
camcorder’s
recording mode,
operating mode and
recording format.
File System UDF/FAT Switches between UDF and FAT as the
recording mode (execute by selecting
Execute).
HD/SD HD/SD Switches between HD or SD as the
operating mode (execute by selecting
Execute).
Note
When the optional CBK-MD01 is not
installed, [SD] cannot be selected. (SD
recording is not allowed.)
HD System Line 1080/720 When the operating mode is HD, sets
the number of system lines to 1080 or
720 (execute by selecting Execute).
System Frequency The available settings
vary depending on the
settings in HD/SD, HD
System Line, and
Country.
Selects the system frequency (execute
by selecting Execute).
59.94i/29.97P/23.98P When the HD/SD setting is [HD], the
HD System Line setting is [1080], and
the Country setting is other than [PAL
Area].
50i/25P • When the HD/SD setting is [HD], the
HD System Line setting is [1080], and
the Country setting is [PAL Area].
• When the HD/SD setting is [SD], and
the Country setting is [PAL Area].
59.94P/29.97P/23.98P When the HD/SD setting is [HD], the
HD System Line setting is [720], and
the Country setting is other than [PAL
Area].
50P/25P When the HD/SD setting is [HD], the
HD System Line setting is [720], and
the Country setting is [PAL Area].
59.94i/29.97P When the HD/SD setting is [SD], and
the Country setting is other than [PAL
Area].
Menu List 113
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Format
Specifies the
camcorder’s
operating mode and
recording format.
Rec Format The available settings
vary depending on the
settings in UDF/FAT, HD/
SD, HD System Line, and
System Frequency.
Selects the recording format (execute by
selecting Execute).
HD422 50/HD420 HQ • When the UDF/FAT setting is [UDF],
the HD/SD setting is [HD], the HD
System Line setting is [1080].
• When the UDF/FAT setting is [UDF],
the HD/SD setting is [HD], the HD
System Line setting is [720], and the
System Frequency setting is
[23.98P].(When the System
Frequency setting is [25P], [29.97P],
or [50P], this setting is fixed to
[HD422 50].)
HQ 1920/HQ 1440 When the UDF/FAT setting is FAT, the
HD/SD setting is [HD], the HD System
Line setting is [1080], and the System
Frequency setting is [29.97P] or [25P].
HQ 1920/HQ 1440/
SP 1440
When the UDF/FAT setting is FAT, the
HD/SD setting is [HD], the HD System
Line setting is [1080], and the System
Frequency setting is other than [29.97P]
and [25P].
HQ 1280 When the UDF/FAT setting is FAT, the
HD/SD setting is [HD], and the HD
System Line setting is [720].
IMX50/DVCAM When the UDF/FAT setting is [UDF]
and the HD/SD setting is [SD].
DVCAM When the UDF/FAT setting is [FAT] and
the HD/SD setting is [HD].
Aspect Ratio (SD) 16:9/4:3 Selects the aspect ratio when SD mode
is selected (execute by selecting
Execute).
Audio
Length(IMX)
24bit/16bit Selects the audio bit rate for recording
in IMX format.
Country NTSC Area/NTSC(J)
Area/PAL Area
Selects the area of use (execute by
selecting Execute).
Format Media
Executes a media
format.
Media(A) Execute/Cancel Initializes the SxS memory card in slot
A (execute by selecting Execute).
Media(B) Execute/Cancel Initializes the SxS memory card in slot
B (execute by selecting Execute).
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
114
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Input/Output
Makes settings
related to I/O signals.
In FAT mode
Output& i.LINK
HD&HDV/SD&HDV/
SD&DV
Selects the signals output from the
video connectors and the i.LINK (HDV/
DV) connector.
When the HD/SD setting is SD,
“SD&DV” or “SD” is selected.
In UDF mode
Output
HD/SD
23.98P Output PsF/Pull Down When the video format is HQ 1920/
23.98P or HQ 1440/23.98P, selects
whether to use progressive output (PsF)
or pulldown output (Pull Down).
Source Select a) Camera/i.LINK
/External
Selects whether to use the camera
picture (Camera), the i.LINK input (in
FAT mode only) or the SDI/composite
input (External) as the video input
source.
Notes
• When Rec Source is assigned to the
ASSIGN. 2 switch, this setting is
disabled.
• Changing the setting of File System
>UDF/FAT resets this item to
[Camera] (factory default setting).
Ext Video Source a) HD SDI/SD SDI/
Composite
Selects the external input signal.
HD-SDI: HDSDI signals (in HD mode
only)
SD-SDI: SDSDI signals
Composite: Composite signals
i.LINK I/O Enable/Disable Selects whether to enable or disable
input and output of signals via the
i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector.
When Enable is selected, you can
execute auto black balance adjustment
during i.LINK output.
SDI Output On/Off Turns on or off the output of signals
from the HD/SD SDI OUT connector.
SDI Out Super On/Off Turns on or off the superimposition of
text information on the output of the
HD/SD SDI OUT connector
Video Out Super On/Off Turns on or off the superimposition of
text information on the output of the
VIDEO OUT connector.
Live & Play On/Off Turns Live & Play function on or off.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 115
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Input/Output
Makes settings
related to I/O signals.
Down Converter Crop/Letter/Squeeze Selects the signal conversion mode for
output of SD signals.
Crop: Crop the edges of the 16:9
picture and output as a 4:3 picture.
Letter: Mask the top and bottom of the
4:3 picture and display in the center
of the screen as a 16:9 picture.
Squeeze: Squeeze the 16:9 picture
horizontally and output as a 4:3
picture.
Wide ID Through/Auto Selects whether to add a wide ID signal
to the SD output signal.
Through: Output without adding a
wide ID signal.
Auto: Add and output a wide ID signal
when the Down Converter setting is
Squeeze.
Wide
Mode(EXT) a)
Auto/16:9 When the input signal is SD, select the
method that determines whether the
signal is treated as a wide signal.
Auto: When wide a ID signal is
detected in the input signal, treat
the signal as a wide signal and set
the up-converter operating mode to
squeeze mode. When a wide ID
signal is not detected, set the
upconverter operating mode to
edge crop mode and do not record a
wide ID signal.
16:9: Always treat the signal as a wide
signal and set the upconverter
operating mode to squeeze mode.
Setup
Remove(EXT) a)
7.5%/0.0% When the Country setting is other than
[PAL Area], selects whether to remove
the setup level of analog input video
signals.
7.5%: Remove the setup.
0.0%: Do not remove the setup.
Super Impose
Makes settings
related to
superimposed text
and markers.
Super(VF Display) On/Off When the setting of Input/Output >SDI
Out Super or Video Out Super is On,
superimpose text information on the
output from the HD/SD SDI OUT
connector, and VIDEO OUT connector,
as specified (On or Off) for each item.
Super(Menu) On/Off
Super(Timecode) On/Off
Super(Marker) On/Off When the setting of Input/Output
>Video Out Super is On, specifies
whether to superimpose markers on the
output from the VIDEO OUT
connector.
LCD LCD Color –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the LCD color.
LCD
Marker&Zebra
On/Off Turns the marker and zebra display in
the LCD monitor on or off.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
116
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Rec Function
Makes settings
related to special
recording modes.
Note
When Picture Cache
is assigned to an
assignable switch,
this item is disabled
(displayed in grey).
Slow & Quick On/Off Turns the Slow & Quick Motion
function on or off. (When this is set to
On, the Picture Cache Rec, Interval Rec,
and Frame Rec sub-items are set to Off.)
Frame Rate The available settings
vary depending on the
Format >HD System Line
setting.
When the Slow & Quick setting is On,
sets the frame rate for Slow & Quick
Motion shooting.
When Format >Country is
set to other than [PAL
Area] in UDF mode or in
FAT mode: 1 to 30
When Format >Country is
set to [PAL Area] in UDF
mode: 1 to 25
When the HD System Line setting is
1080.
When Format >Country is
set to other than [PAL
Area] in UDF mode or in
FAT mode: 1 to 30 to 60
When Format >Country is
set to [PAL Area] in UDF
mode: 1 to 25 to 50
When the HD System Line setting is
720.
Clip Continuous
Rec
On/Off Turns the Clip Continuous Rec function
on or off. (When this is set to On, the
Slow & Quick, Picture Cache Rec,
Interval Rec, and Frame Rec sub-items
are set to Off.)
Picture Cache Rec On/Off Turns the picture cache function on or
off. (When this is set to On, the Slow &
Quick, Interval Rec, Frame Rec sub-
items are set to Off.)
P. Cache Rec Time 0-2sec/2-4sec/4-6sec/
6-8sec/8-10sec/10-12sec/
12-14sec/13-15sec
When the Picture Cache Rec setting is
On, set the picture cache time.
Interval Rec On/Off Turns the Interval Rec function on or
off. (When this is set to On, the Slow &
Quick, Picture Cache Rec, and Frame
Rec sub-items are set to Off.)
Frame Rec On/Off Turns the Frame Rec function on or off.
(When this is set to On, the Slow &
Quick, Picture Cache Rec, and Interval
Rec sub-items are set to Off.)
Number of Frames The available settings
vary depending on the
settings in Format >HD
System Line and Format
>System Frequency.
When Interval Rec or Frame Rec is set
to On, specifies the number of frames to
shoot in one Interval Rec or Frame Rec
take.
2frame/6frame/12frame When the HD System Line setting is
720, and the System Frequency setting
is 59.94P or 50P.
1frame/3frame/6frame/
9frame
When the HD System Line setting is
other than 720, or the System Frequency
setting is other than 59.94P or 50P.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 117
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Rec Function
Makes settings
related to special
recording modes.
Interval Time 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/15/
20/30/40/50 (sec)
1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/15/
20/30/40/50 (min) 1/2/3/
4/6/12/24 (hour)
When the Interval Rec setting is On,
sets the interval for Interval Rec
shooting.
Pre-Lighting Off/2sec/5sec/10sec If you want the video light to be turned
on before Interval Rec shooting, select a
number of seconds before the start of
shooting. If you do not want it to be
turned on, select Off.
Live Logging d) Live/View In UDF mode: Selects the Live
Logging operation mode.
In FAT mode: Fixed to [Live] (live
mode).
Note
When one of Frame Rec, Interval Rec,
and Clip Continuous Rec modes is
selected, [View] cannot be selected.
For details on Live Logging functions,
refer to the Supplement supplied in the
CD-ROM (labeled “Manuals for Solid-
State Memory Camcorder”).
Assignable SW
Assigns functions to
assignable switches.
See “Assigning
Functions to
Assignable Switches”
(page 155) for more
information about
assigning functions.
<0> See page 155. Assigns function to ASSIGN. 0 switch.
<1> Assigns function to ASSIGN. 1 switch.
<2> Assigns function to ASSIGN. 2 switch.
<3> Assigns function to ASSIGN. 3 switch.
<4> Assigns function to ASSIGNABLE 4
switch.
<5> Assigns function to ASSIGNABLE 5
switch.
RET Assigns function to RET button on the
lens.
C. Temp Assigns function to COLOR TEMP.
button.
Zoom Speed 0 to 20 to 99 When Zoom has been assigned to the
ASSIGNABLE 4 or 5 switch, specifies
the zoom speed.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
118
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
VF Setting
Makes settings
related to the
viewfinder screen.
Color b) –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the density of the colors
displayed in the viewfinder screen.
Mode b) Color/B&W Selects the display mode of the
viewfinder.
Color: Color
B&W: Monochrome
Peaking Type b) Normal/Color/Both Selects the peaking type.
Normal: Normal peaking
Color: Color peaking
Both: Both
Peaking
Frequency b)
Normal/High Selects Normal or High as the peaking
frequency.
Peaking Color b) White/Red/Yellow/Blue When the Peaking Type setting is Color,
selects the peaking color from among
White, Red, Yellow, and Blue.
VF Detail Level c) –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the detail level (set on the
camcorder) of the viewfinder
Color Peaking
Level b)
Low/Mid/High When the Peaking Type setting is Both,
selects the color peaking level from
among Low, Mid, and High.
Marker
Makes settings
related to marker
display in the
viewfinder screen.
Setting On/Off Turns all markers on or off.
Note
When Marker is assigned to the ASSIGN.
2 switch, this setting is disabled.
Center Marker 1/2/3/4/Off When the center marker is displayed,
selects the type. Select Off if you do not
want to display the marker.
Note
When three of Safety Zone, User Box,
Guide Frame, and 100% Marker are set to
[On], this setting cannot be turned on.
Center H Position –40 to 0 to 40 Specifies the horizontal position of the
center marker.
Center V Position –40 to 0 to 40 Specifies the vertical position of the
center marker.
Safety Zone On/Off Turns the safety zone display on or off.
Note
When three of Center Marker, User Box,
Guide Frame, and 100% Marker are set to
[On], this setting cannot be turned on.
Safety Area 80%/90%/92.5%/95% Selects the safety zone range.
Aspect Marker Line/Mask/Off When an aspect marker is to be
displayed, selects the display method.
Select Off if you do not want to display
the marker.
Line: Show as white lines.
Mask: Display by lowering the video
signal level of areas outside the
marker range.
Aspect Select 15:9/14:9/13:9/4:3/
1.66:1/1.85:1/2.35:1/2.4:1
Selects the aspect ratio of the marker.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 119
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Marker
Makes settings
related to marker
display in the
viewfinder screen.
100% Marker On/Off Turns the 100% safety zone display on
or off.
Note
When three of Center Marker, Safety Zone,
User Box, and Guide Frame are set to [On],
this setting cannot be turned on.
Aspect Mask 0% to 30% to 90% (10%
step)
When the Aspect Marker setting is
Mask, specifies the video signal level of
areas outside the marker range as a
percentage value relative to the video
signal level of areas inside the marker
range.
User Box On/Off Turns the box cursor display on or off.
Note
When three of Center Marker, Safety Zone,
Guide Frame, and 100% Marker are set to
[On], this setting cannot be turned on.
User Box Width 40 to 500 to 999 Specifies the box cursor width (distance
from the center to the left and right
edges).
User Box Height 70 to 500 to 999 Specifies the box cursor height
(distance from the center to the top and
bottom edges).
User Box H
Position
–479 to 0 to 479 Specifies the horizontal position of the
box cursor center.
User Box V
Position
–464 to 0 to 464 Specifies the vertical position of the box
cursor center.
Guide Frame On/Off Turns display of the guide frame on or
off.
Note
When three of Center Marker, Safety Zone,
User Box, and 100% Marker are set to
[On], this setting cannot be turned on.
Gain Switch
Makes settings
related to the GAIN
switch.
Gain Low –6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/
6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
Specifies the gain value for the
L position of the GAIN switch.
Gain Mid –6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/
6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
Specifies the gain value for the
M position of the GAIN switch.
Gain High –6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/
6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
Specifies the gain value for the
H position of the GAIN switch.
Gain Turbo –6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/
6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
Specifies the gain value for the Turbo
Gain function, which can be assigned to
an assignable switch.
Shockless Gain On/Off Turns shockless gain (a function that
switches smoothly when the gain is
switched) on or off.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
120
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
TLCS
Makes settings
related to total level
control.
Mode Backlight/Standard/
Spotlight
Selects the auto iris mode used when the
TLCS system is activated.
Backlight: Backlight mode (lessens the
blackout of the main subject that
occurs under backlit conditions)
Standard: Standard mode
Spotlight: Spotlight mode (lessens the
whiteout of the main subject that
occurs under a spotlight)
Speed –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the control speed (speed of
reaction to changes in the video) used
when the TLCS system is activated.
(Larger values specify quicker reaction
times.)
AGC On/Off Turns the AGC (auto gain control)
function on or off.
AGC Limit 3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/
18dB
Specifies the maximum gain used when
AGC is on.
AGC Point F5.6/F4/F2.8 Specifies the F value where control by
auto iris switches to control by AGC,
used when AGC is on.
Auto Shutter On/Off Turns the auto shutter function on or off.
Auto Shutter Limit 1/100 / 1/150 / 1/200 /
1/250
Selects the maximum shutter speed used
when auto shutter is on.
Auto Shutter Point F5.6/F8/F11/F16 Specifies the F value where control by
auto iris switches to control by auto
shutter, used when auto shutter is on.
Zebra
Makes settings
related to zebra
displays.
Zebra Select 1/2/BOTH Selects the zebra pattern type (Zebra1,
Zebra2, Both).
Zebra1 Level 50% to 70% to 107% Specifies the Zebra1 display level.
Zebra1 Aperture
Level
1 to 10% to 20% Specifies the Zebra1 aperture level.
Zebra2 Level 52% to 100% to 109% Specifies the Zebra2 display level.
Display On/Off
Selects the items to
display in the
viewfinder screen.
Video Level
Warnings
On/Off Turns the warnings that appear when the
video level is too bright or too dark on
or off.
Brightness Display On/Off Turns the numerical indication of the
video brightness on or off.
Histogram Display
(In HD mode only)
On/Off Turns the histogram display of video
signal levels on or off.
Lens Info Meter/Feet/Off Selects whether or not to display the
depth of field indication and the unit for
display of the depth of field.
Meter: Displayed in meters
Feet: Displayed in feet
Off: Do not display
Focus Position On/Off Turns the indication of the lens focus
position on or off.
Zoom Position On/Off Turns the indication of the lens zoom
position on or off.
Audio Level Meter On/Off Turns the display of the audio level
meters on or off.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 121
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Display On/Off
Selects the items to
display in the
viewfinder screen.
Timecode On/Off Turns the display of time data
(timecode, user bits, counter, duration)
on or off.
Battery Remain On/Off Turns the indications of the remaining
battery time and input voltage on or off.
Media Remain On/Off Turns the indication of the remaining
media capacity on or off.
TLCS Mode On/Off Turns the indication of the TLCS
operating mode on or off.
Focus Mode On/Off Turns the indication of the focus
operating mode on or off.
White Balance
Mode
On/Off Turns the indication of the white
balance mode on or off.
Filter Position On/Off Turns the indication of the ND filter
setting on or off.
Iris Position On/Off Turns the indication of the iris position
on or off.
Gain Setting On/Off Turns the indication of the gain setting
on or off.
Shutter Setting On/Off Turns the indications of the shutter
mode and shutter speed on or off.
Color Temp On/Off Turns the indication of the color
temperature on or off.
Video Format On/Off Turns the indication of the video format
on or off.
System Line On/Off Turns the indication of the system lines
on or off.
Rec Mode On/Off Turns the indication of special recording
modes (S&Q, Interval, Frame Rec,
Picture Cache Rec) on or off.
Extender On/Off Turns the lens extender indication on or
off.
WRR RF Level On/Off Turns the indication of the digital
wireless receiver reception level on or
off.
Clip Number(PB) On/Off Turns the indication of clip information
on or off.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
122
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
“!” LED c) Gain<!> On/Off Turns on or off the function to light the !
indicator when the gain is set to other
than 0 dB.
Shutter <!> On/Off Turns on or off the function to light the !
indicator when the SHUTTER selector
is set to ON.
White Preset <!> On/Off Turns on or off the function to light the !
indicator when the WHITE BAL switch
is set to PRST.
ATW Run <!> On/Off Turns on or off the function to light the !
indicator when White Setting >White
Switch<B> is set to [ATW].
Extender <!> On/Off Turns on or off the function to light the !
indicator when the lens extender is used.
Iris Override <!> On/Off Turns on or off the function to light the !
indicator when the reference value of
auto iris adjustment is not the standard
value.
Auto Iris
Makes settings
related to auto iris.
Iris Override On/Off Turns iris override (a setting that opens
or closes the iris more than normal) on
or off.
Iris Speed –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the iris control speed (speed of
reaction to changes in the video).
(Larger values specify quicker reaction
times.)
Clip High light On/Off Turns on or off the function that
disregards highlights and forces a flatter
reaction to high luminance.
Iris Window 1/2/3/4/5/6/Var Selects the auto iris detection window
type.
Var: Variable
Iris Window
Indication
On/Off Turns the indication of the auto iris
detection window frame on or off.
Shot ID
Creates the shot IDs
superimposed on
the color bars.
ID-1 Creates ID-1 strings (up to 16
characters) superimposed.
ID-2 Creates ID-2 strings (up to 16
characters) superimposed.
ID-3 Creates ID-3 strings (up to 16
characters) superimposed.
ID-4 Creates ID-4 strings (up to 16
characters) superimposed.
Shot Display
Selects which shot
data is
superimposed on
the color bars and
recorded.
Shot Date On/Off Selects whether to superimpose the shot
date (On) or not (Off).
Shot Time On/Off Selects whether to superimpose the shot
time (On) or not (Off).
Shot Model Name On/Off Selects whether to superimpose the
model name (On) or not (Off).
Shot Serial
Number
On/Off Selects whether to superimpose the
serial number (On) or not (Off).
Shot ID Select ID-1/ID-2/ID-3/ID-4/Off Selects whether or not to superimpose
the shot ID set with the Shot ID item
and which shot ID is superimposed.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 123
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
White Setting
Makes settings
related to auto white
balance adjustments.
White Switch<B> Memory/ATW Specifies the operating mode selected
by the B position of the WHITE BAL
switch.
Memory: Auto white balance
ATW: Auto tracing white balance
Shockless White Off/1/2/3 Specifies the reaction speed when the
WHITE BAL switch setting is changed.
Off is an instant reaction, and 1 is faster
than 2 or 3.
ATW Speed 1/2/3/4/5 Specifies the reaction speed when the
White Switch<B> setting is [ATW]. 1 is
the fastest reaction.
AWB Fixed Area On/Off Specifies whether auto white balance is
executed at the center of the screen.
On: Execute in an area corresponding
to 25% of the height and width of
the screen.
Off: Execute in an area corresponding
to 70% of the height and width of
the screen.
Filter White
Memory
On/Off Specifies whether to allocate a white
balance memory area for each FILTER
knob position.
On: Allocation a white balance memory
area for each FILTER knob
position.
Off: Use A/B memory regardless of the
filter position.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
124
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Offset White
Makes settings
related to white
balance offset values.
Offset White <A> On/Off Specifies whether to add (On) or not to
add (Off) an offset value to the white
balance value in memory A.
Warm Cool <A> Approximate color
temperature
When the setting of Offset White<A> is
[On], specifies (as a color temperature)
the offset to add to the white balance
value in memory A. (Note that the error
range becomes larger for higher offset
color temperatures. Adjust while
viewing the actual video.)
Warm Cool
Balance<A>
–99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a more precise color
temperature, for use when satisfactory
video cannot be obtained with the Warm
Cool <A> setting.
Offset White <B> On/Off When this is set to [On], the offset
adjusted set with this item is added to
the white balance of channel B.
Warm Cool <B> Approximate color
temperature
When the setting of Offset White<B> is
[On], specifies (as a color temperature)
the offset to add to the white balance
value in memory B. (Note that the error
range becomes larger for higher offset
color temperatures. Adjust while
viewing the actual video.)
Warm Cool
Balance<B>
–99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a more precise color
temperature, for use when satisfactory
video cannot be obtained with the Warm
Cool <B> setting.
Shutter
Makes settings
related to the shutter
setting.
Shutter Select Second/Degree Specifies the unit used to select shutter
speeds.
Second: Select in units of seconds.
Degree: Select in units of degrees.
Slow Shutter On/Off Turns the SLS mode on or off.
SLS Frames 2Frames/3Frames/
4Frames/Frames/
6Frames/7Frames/
8Frames/16Frames
Selects the number of accumulated
frames in SLS mode.
Time Zone
Specifies the time
zone.
Zone –12:00 to +0:00 to +14:00
(in steps of 30 minutes)
Specifies a difference from UTC
(Greenwich Mean Time) in units of
30 minutes.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 125
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Clip
Make settings for clip
name or clip
management.
Note
Do not assign clip
names that begin with
the “.” (period)
symbol.
Clips with names in
which the first
character is “.” cannot
be viewed on the
application software
for computers.
Auto Naming In Fat mode: Title/Plan
In UDF mode: C****/
Title/Plan
Selects the clip naming format.
C****: XDCAM standard name (In
UDF mode only)
Title: Name specified by Title Prefix
Plan: Name specified in planning
metadata (if no name is specified in
planning metadata, the name
specified by Title Prefix is
selected.)
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
126
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Clip
Make settings for clip
name or clip
management.
Note
Do not assign clip
names that begin with
the “.” (period)
symbol.
Clips with names in
which the first
character is “.” cannot
be viewed on the
application software
for computers.
Title Prefix Text input Specifies the title part (4 to 46
alphanumeric characters) of clip titles.
When the currently specified title is
eight characters or fewer in length, the
entire title appears. When the title is
longer than eight characters, the first
seven characters appear and a “···”
symbol appears in place of the eighth
character.
Displays the Character Set screen.
Character Set screen configuration
• Character selection area (three lines)
Select the character to insert at the title
prefix cursor position.
!#$%()+.-.;=@[]^_~0123456789
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
• Cursor operation area (one line)
Space: Changes the character at the
cursor position to a space
INS: Inserts a space at the cursor
position
DEL: Deletes the character at the cursor
position
T: Moves the cursor to the left
t: Moves the cursor to the right
ESC: Cancels the change and return to
the normal menu
END: Executes the change and return to
the normal menu
• Title prefix area (one line)
An area to enter the title
To set titles
1Turn the MENU knob or press the
arrow buttons to select a character,
highlighting it, in the character
selection area, and then press the
MENU knob or the SET button to
insert it at the cursor position in the
title prefix area. (The cursor moves to
the right.)
2Repeat step 1 to add more characters
to the title (using Space, INS, and
DEL as required).
3When you have finished entering the
title, select END to close the
Character Set screen.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 127
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Clip
Make settings for clip
name or clip
management.
Note
Do not assign clip
names that begin with
the “.” (period)
symbol.
Clips with names in
which the first
character is “.” cannot
be viewed on the
application software
for computers.
Number Set 00001 to 99999 Specifies the initial value of the numeric
part (five digits) of clip names (The
numeric part of clip names is limited to
four digits number if Auto Naming is
set to other than [Plan] or if planning
metadata is invalid though Auto
Naming is set to [Plan].)
Name Display Off/Viewfinder/LCD
Status/Both
Selects whether or not to display the
name of the next clips to be recorded (in
E-E mode), and where to display the
name.
Off: Do not display
Viewfinder: Display on the viewfinder
screen
LCD Status: Display on the LCD
monitor (with the display mode se
to STATUS)
Both: Display on both the viewfinder
screen and the LCD monitor
Note
If a clip with the same name as the next
clip to be recorded already exists on the
recording media, then immediately after
recording begins the clip name is displayed
with a different serial number (when the
selection is other than Off).
Update Media<A>/Media<B> Updates the management files on the
media in the selected slot (execute by
selecting Execute).
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
128
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
a) When the optional CBK-HD02 is installed
b) When the CBK-VF01 is used.
c) When an HDVF series viewfinder is used.
d) When the optional CBK-UPG01 is installed.
Plan.Metadata
Makes settings for
operating planning
metadata.
Load/Slot(A) Execute/Cancel Executes load of planning metadata
from the SxS memory card in slot A.
Select [Execute] to show the list of the
planning metadata files stored in the slot A
SxS memory card and select a file to
execute the load.
Load/Slot(B) Execute/Cancel Executes load of planning metadata
from the SxS memory card in slot B.
Select [Execute] to show the list of the
planning metadata files stored in the slot
B SxS memory card and select a file to
execute the load.
Load/USB
(in UDF mode
only)
Execute/Cancel Executes load of planning metadata
from the USB flash drive connected to
the external device connector.
Select [Execute] to show the list of the
planning metadata files stored in the
USB flash drive and select a file to
execute the load.
Properties Execute/Cancel Displays the detailed information in the
planning metadata loaded on the
camcorder (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
Clear Execute/Cancel Clears the planning metadata loaded on
the camcorder (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
Clip Name Disp Title1(ASCII)/
Title2(UTF-8)
Selects the display mode of the clip
name specified in planning metadata
(see page 89).
USB
Makes settings for
operating a USB
flash drive (in UDF
mode only)
Memory Rec Enable/Disable Select whether to enable or disable the
record of proxy data to a USB flash
drive.
Copy Current Clip Execute/Cancel Executes the copy of the proxy data for
the current clip to a USB flash drive
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
Copy All Clips Execute/Cancel Executes the copy of the proxy data for
all clips stored in the selected SxS
memory card to a USB flash drive
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
Del All Memory
Clips
Execute/Cancel Executes the clear of the proxy data for
all clips copied to a USB flash drive
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
Format USB
Memory
Execute/Cancel Executes the FAT32 format of a USB
flash drive (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 129
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Settings in bold are the factory default values.
PAINT Menu
PAINT
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Switch Status
Turns various signal
correction functions
and a test signal on or
off.
Gamma On/Off Turns gamma correction on or off.
Black Gamma On/Off Turns black gamma correction on or
off.
Matrix On/Off Turns linear matrix correction and
user matrix correction on or off.
Knee On/Off Turns knee correction on or off.
White Clip On/Off Turns white clip correction on or
off.
Detail On/Off Turns detail correction on or off.
Aperture On/Off Turns aperture correction on or off.
Flare On/Off Turns flare correction on or off.
Test Saw On/Off Turns the test saw signal on or off.
White
Sets the color
temperature, and
performs manual white
balance adjustment.
Color Temp <A> 1500K to 3200K to
50000K
Displays the white balance color
temperature saved in memory A.
Color Temp BAL
<A>
–99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance gain
values saved in memory A (linked R
gain and B gain).
R Gain <A> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance R gain
value saved in memory A.
B Gain <A> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance B gain
value saved in memory A.
Color Temp <B> 1500K to 3200K to
50000K
Displays the white balance color
temperature saved in memory B.
Color Temp BAL
<B>
–99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance gain
values saved in memory B (linked R
gain and B gain).
R Gain <B> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance R gain
value saved in memory B.
B Gain <B> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance B gain
value saved in memory B.
Black
Specifies the black
level (level of the
unilluminated parts of
the video).
You can achieve a
desired look by
adjusting the black
level for deeper or
shallower blacks.
Master Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the master black level.
R Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the R black level.
B Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the B black level.
Menu List
130
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Flare
Makes settings related
to flare.
Flare is light generated
from a bright image
region that spreads
broadly across the
image, adding light to
dark regions and
reducing contrast. It is
caused by reflection
inside the lens system.
Flare On/Off Turns flare correction on or off.
Master Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the master flare correction
level.
R Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the R flare correction level.
G Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the G flare correction level.
B Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the B flare correction level.
Gamma
Makes settings related
to gamma.
Gamma correction
allows you to
significantly alter the
impression made by the
video by adjusting the
contrast.
Gamma On/Off Turns gamma correction on or off.
Step Gamma 0.35 to 0.45 to 0.90 (0.05
step)
Specifies a gamma correction value
in steps of 0.05
Master Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the master gamma level.
R Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the R gamma level.
G Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the G gamma level.
B Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the B gamma level.
Gamma Select The available settings
vary depending on the
setting in Gamma
Category (see
“Description”).
Select the gamma table to use in
gamma correction.
When Gamma Category is STD:
1 DVW: DVW camcorder
equivalent
2 ×4.5: ×4.5 gain
3 ×3.5: ×3.5 gain
4 240M: SMPTE-240M equivalent
5 R709: ITU-R709 equivalent
(default setting)
6 ×5.0: ×5.0 gain
When Gamma Category is HG:
1 3250: Condense 325% video input
to 100% video output
2 4600: Condense 460% video input
to 100% video output
3 3259: Condense 325% video input
to 109% video output
4 4609: Condense 460% video input
to 109% video output (default
setting)
Gamma Category STD/HG Selects use of standard gamma
(STD) or HyperGamma (HG).
Black Gamma
Makes settings related
to black gamma
correction.
Black gamma
correction allows you
to reproduce gradations
and color nuances in
black or near-black
(dark) parts of the
picture.
Black Gamma On/Off Turns black gamma correction on or
off.
Gamma Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the master black gamma
level.
Range Low/L Mid/H.Mid/High Selects the black gamma correction
effective range.
LOW: 0 to 3.6%
L.MID: 0 to 7.2%
H MID: 0 to 14.4%
HIGH: 0 to 28.8%
PAINT
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 131
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Knee
Makes settings related
to knee correction.
Knee correction is
processing that
prevents washout by
compressing the bright
parts of the video
according to an upper
limit for the dynamic
range of the recorded
and output picture. The
signal level where knee
processing begins is
called the “knee point”,
and the slope of knee
compression is called
the “knee slope”.
Knee On/Off Turns knee correction on or off.
Knee Point 50.0% to 95.0% to
109.0%
Specifies the knee point.
Knee Slope –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the knee slope.
Knee Saturation On/Off Turns the knee saturation function
on or off.
Knee Saturation
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the knee saturation level.
White Clip
Makes settings related
to white clipping
adjustments.
White clipping is
processing that limits
the maximum level of
video output signals.
The maximum video
signal output value is
called the “white clip
level”.
White Clip On/Off Turns white clipping adjustment on
or off.
Level [NTSC Area] or [NTSC
Area(J)] is selected for
Country
90.0% to 108.0% to
109.0%
[PAL Area] is selected for
Country
90.0% to 105.0% to
109.0%
Specifies the white clip level.
PAINT
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
132
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Detail(HD Mode)/
Detail(SD Mode)
Makes settings related
to details adjustments
in HD mode and SD
mode.
Detail adjustment is
processing that
improves the clarity of
the video by adding
detail signals to the
edges of the subject.
Detail On/Off Turns detail adjustment on or off.
Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the detail level.
H/V Ratio –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the mix ratio between the
H detail level and the V detail level.
Crispening –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the crispening level.
Level Depend On/Off Turns the level depend adjustment
function on or off.
Level Depend Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the level depend level.
Frequency –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the central frequency for H
detail signals. Larger values give
finer details.
Knee Aperture On/Off Turns the knee aperture function on
or off.
Knee Aperture Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the knee aperture level.
Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the detail limiter values for
both the white-side and black-side
direction.
White Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white-side detail
limiter value.
Black Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the black-side detail
limiter value.
V-BLK Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the black-side V detail
limiter value.
V Detail Creation NAM/G/R+G/Y Selects the source signal used to
generate the V detail signal.
NAM: A V detail signal created
from the R signal, or a V detail
signal created from the G
signal, or a V detail signal
created from the B signal,
whichever is the signal with the
highest level
G: G signal
G+R: Composite signal comprising
the G signal and R signal in a
1:1 ratio
Y: Y signal
Cross Color
(in SD mode only)
–99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the cross color reduction level
for details.
Note
When Detail is set to [Off] or
OPERATION >Format >Country is set
to [Pal Area], this setting is disabled.
PAINT
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 133
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Aperture
Makes settings related
to aperture correction.
Aperture correction is
processing to improve
resolution by adding
high-frequency
aperture signals to the
video signal, which
corrects degeneration
due to high-frequency
characteristics.
Aperture On/Off Turns aperture correction on or off.
Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the aperture level.
Skin Detail
Makes settings related
to skin detail
correction.
Skin detail correction is
processing that
increases or decreases
the detail level of a
specified color range
(skin tone range), for
the purpose of
obtaining attractive
reproduction of skin
tones.
Skin Detail On/Off Turns skin detail correction on or
off.
Area Detection Color detection screen Detects the color to be targeted by
skin detail correction.
Area Indication On/Off Turns on or off the function that
displays a zebra pattern in the area
targeted by skin detail correction.
Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the skin detail level.
Saturation –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the saturation of the color
targeted by skin detail correction.
Hue 0 to 359 Specifies the hue of the color
targeted by skin detail correction.
Width 0 to 40 to 90 Specifies a range for the hue of the
color targeted by skin detail
correction.
Matrix
Makes settings related
to matrix correction.
Matrix correction
allows you to adjust the
color and vividness of
the video. Depending
on the effect you want,
you can select one from
among a number of
preset matrixes, which
define different
parameter sets. Or you
can select a user matrix
with your own
parameters.
Matrix On/Off Turns the matrix correction function
on or off.
Preset Matrix On/Off Turns the preset matrix function on
or off.
Preset Select 1/2/3/4/5/6 Selects a preset matrix.
1: SMPTE-240M equivalent
2: ITU-709 equivalent
3: SMPTE WIDE equivalent
4: NTSC equivalent
5: EBU equivalent
6: PAL equivalent
User Matrix On/Off Turns the user matrix function on or
off.
User Matrix R-G –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely defined R-G user
matrix.
User Matrix R-B –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely defined R-B user
matrix.
User Matrix G-R –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely defined G-R user
matrix.
User Matrix G-B –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely defined G-B user
matrix.
User Matrix B-R –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely defined B-R user
matrix.
User Matrix B-G –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely defined B-G user
matrix.
PAINT
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
134
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Multi Matrix
Makes settings related
to multi matrix
correction.
Multi-matrix correction
allows specific colors
to be selected for
saturation correction in
a 16-axis hue space.
Multi Matrix On/Off Turns the multi matrix correction
function on or off.
Area Indication On/Off Turns on or off the function that
displays a zebra pattern in the color
area targeted by multi matrix
correction.
Color Detection Color detection screen Detects colors targeted by multi
matrix correction.
Axis B/B+/MG–/MG/MG+/
R/R+/YL–/YL/YL+/G–/
G/G+/CY/CY+/B–
Specifies a color targeted by multi
matrix correction (16-axis mode)
Hue –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the hue of the color
targeted by multi matrix correction
for each 16-axis mode.
Saturation –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the saturation of the color
targeted by multi matrix correction
for each 16-axis mode.
V Modulation
Makes settings related
to V modulation
shading.
V modulation shading
corrects vertical
imbalances in
sensitivity arising from
the relationship
between a lens and
prism.
V Modulation On/Off Turns V modulation shading on or
off.
Master V
Modulation
–99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the master V modulation
level.
R V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the V modulation level of
R signals.
G V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the V modulation level of
G signals.
B V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the V modulation level of
B signals.
Low Key Sat.
Makes settings related
to low key saturation
correction.
You can correct the
saturation of colors in
dark parts of the video
only.
Low Key Saturation On/Off Turns low key saturation correction
on or off.
Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the saturation of colors in
low luminance areas.
Range Low/L Mid/H.Mid/High Specifies the luminance level for
which low key saturation is enabled.
Noise Suppress
Makes settings related
to noise suppression
(noise compression).
You can effectively
suppress noise
components while
preserving fine edge
components in the
subject.
Noise Suppress On/Off Turns noise suppression on or off.
PAINT
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 135
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Settings in bold are the factory default values.
MAINTENANCE Menu
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
White Shading
Makes settings related
to white shading.
White shading is
required for each
different lens to correct
irregularities arising
from lens
characteristics. It
corrects luminance and
color irregularities in
bright areas.
Channel Select Red/Green/Blue Selects the target of white shading
correction.
R/G/B White H Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a SAW white shading
correction value for the horizontal
direction.
R/G/B White H Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a parabola white shading
correction value for the horizontal
direction.
R/G/B White V Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a SAW white shading
correction value for the vertical
direction.
R/G/B White V Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a parabola white shading
correction value for the vertical
direction.
White Saw/Para On/Off Turns the white shading SAW and
parabola correction functions on or
off.
Black Shading
Makes settings related
to black shading
correction.
Channel Select Red/Green/Blue Selects the target of black shading
correction.
R/G/B Black H Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a SAW black shading
correction value for the horizontal
direction.
R/G/B Black H Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a parabola black shading
correction value for the horizontal
direction.
R/G/B Black V Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a SAW black shading
correction value for the vertical
direction.
R/G/B Black V Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a parabola black shading
correction value for the vertical
direction.
Black Saw/Para On/Off Turns the black shading SAW and
parabola correction functions on or
off.
Master Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the master black level.
Master Gain (TMP) –6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/
6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
Specifies a temporary master gain
value.
Battery
Makes settings related
to batteries.
Info Before End 5%/10%/15%...95%/
100%
Specifies a threshold value that
triggers a “Battery Near End”
warning when a BP-GL65/GL95
battery pack is used.
Info End 0%/1%/2%/3%/4%/5% Specifies a threshold value that
triggers a “Battery End” warning
when a BP-GL65/GL95 battery
pack is used.
Menu List
136
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Battery
Makes settings related
to batteries.
Sony Before End 11.5V to 17V (0.1V step) Specifies a threshold value that
triggers a “Battery Near End”
warning when a BP-L60S/L80S
battery pack is used.
Sony End 11.0V to 11.5V (0.1V
step)
Specifies a threshold value that
triggers a “Battery End” warning
when a BP-L60S/L80S battery pack
is used.
Other Before End 11.5V to 11.8V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Specifies a threshold value that
triggers a “Battery Near End”
warning when a non-Sony battery
pack is used.
Other End 11.0V to 14.0V (0.1V
step)
Specifies a threshold value that
triggers a “Battery End” warning
when a non-Sony battery pack is
used.
DC In Before End 11.5V to 11.8V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Specifies a threshold value that
triggers a “Battery Near End”
warning when an external power
source is connected to the DC IN
connector.
DC In End 11.0V to 14.0V (0.1V
step)
Specifies a threshold value that
triggers a “Battery End” warning
when an external power source is
connected to the DC IN connector.
Detected Battery Info/Sony/Other/DC IN Displays the results of automatic
battery pack type detection.
Type Detection Auto/Other Auto: Detect the battery type
automatically.
Other: Fix battery type detection as
“Other”.
Segment No.10 11.0V to 17.0V (0.1V
step)
Specify voltage threshold values
that cause remaining capacity
segments to go off in the display of
remaining battery capacity (see
page 32). (The segments go off
below the specified value.)
These values are used when the
battery type has been found to be
“Other”.
Segment No.9 11.0V to 16.0V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.8 11.0V to 15.0V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.7 11.0V to 14.0V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.6 11.0V to 13.5V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.5 11.0V to 13.0V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.4 11.0V to 12.5V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.3 11.0V to 12.0V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.2 11.0V to 11.5V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.1 11.0V to 17.0V (0.1V
step)
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 137
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Audio
Makes settings related
to audio.
Front MIC Select Mono/Stereo Selects whether the front
microphone is monaural (Mono) or
stereo (Stereo).
Audio CH3/4 Mode Ch1/2 / Switch Selects the input signals for the
AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4 connectors.
Ch1/2: The same signals as the
AUDIO IN CH-1/ CH-2
connectors.
Switch: The signals selected with
the AUDIO IN CH3/CH4
switches.
Rear XLR Auto On/Off Turns on or off the XLR connection
automatic detection (for the AUDIO
IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors on the
rear panel).
Front MIC CH1 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/
–40dB/–30dB/–20dB
Selects the reference level for
channel 1 of the front microphone.
Front MIC CH2 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/
–40dB/–30dB/–20dB
Selects the reference level for
channel 2 of the front microphone.
Rear MIC CH1 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/
–40dB/–30dB/–20dB
Selects the reference input level
when the setting of the AUDIO IN
CH1 switch is MIC.
Rear MIC CH2 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/
–40dB/–30dB/–20dB
Selects the reference input level
when the setting of the AUDIO IN
CH2 switch is MIC.
Line Input Ref +4dB/0dB/–3dB/EBUL Selects the reference input level
when the AUDIO IN CH1 and
AUDIO IN CH2 switches are set to
LINE.
Min Alarm Volume Off/Set Selects the volume when the
ALARM knob is turned all the way
down.
Off: Almost inaudible
Set: Fairly audible
Speaker Attenuate Off/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB Selects the volume from the monitor
speakers (does not affect earphone
volume).
Headphone Out Mono/Stereo Selects whether the earphones are
monaural (Mono) or stereo (Stereo).
Reference Level –20dB/–18dB/–16dB/
–12dB/EBUL
Selects the output level of the 1 kHz
test signal.
Reference Out 0dB/+4dB/–3dB/EBUL Specifies the output level with
respect to the reference input level.
CH1&2 AGC Mode Mono/Stereo For automatic adjustment of the
input level of analog audio signals
recorded on channels 1 and 2,
specifies whether to make the
adjustments separately for each
channel (Mono) or in stereo mode
(Stereo).
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
138
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Audio
Makes settings related
to audio.
CH3&4 AGC Mode Mono/Stereo For automatic adjustment of the
input level of analog audio signals
recorded on channels 3 and 4,
specifies whether to make the
adjustments separately for each
channel (Mono) or in stereo mode
(Stereo).
AGC Spec –6dB/–9dB/–12dB/
–15dB/–17dB
Selects the AGC saturation level.
Limiter Mode Off/–6dB/–9dB/–12dB/
–15dB/–17dB
For manual audio level adjustments,
selects the saturation level for the
limiter applied to loud input signals.
Select Off if you do not wish to use
the limiter.
Output Limiter On/Off Turns the audio output limiter on or
off.
CH1 Wind Filter On/Off Turns the channel 1 wind filter on or
off.
CH2 Wind Filter On/Off Turns the channel 2 wind filter on or
off.
CH3 Wind Filter On/Off Turns the channel 3 wind filter on or
off.
CH4 Wind Filter On/Off Turns the channel 4 wind filter on or
off.
Audio SG (1KHz) On/Off/Auto Selects whether to output (On) or
not output (Off) a 1 kHz test signal
in color bar mode.
Auto: Output a test signal only
when the AUDIO SELECT
CH1 switch is set to AUTO.
MIC CH1 Level Side1/Front/Front+Side1 For recording input audio from the
front microphone on channel 1,
selects the knob that adjusts the
audio level.
Side1: The LEVEL knob (left) on
the side panel
Front: The MIC LEVEL control on
the front panel
Front+Side1: Adjust with both the
LEVEL knob (left) and the
MIC LEVEL control.
MIC CH2 Level Side2/Front/Front+Side2 For recording input audio from the
front microphone on channel 2,
selects the knob that adjusts the
audio level.
Side2: The LEVEL knob (right) on
the side panel
Front: The MIC LEVEL control on
the front panel
Front+Side2: Adjust with both the
LEVEL knob (right) and the
MIC LEVEL control.
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 139
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Audio
Makes settings related
to audio.
Rear1/WRR Level Side1/Front/Front+Side1 Selects the knob that adjusts the
audio levels of a wireless
microphone and a device connected
to the AUDIO IN CH-1 connector
on the rear panel.
Side1: The LEVEL knob (left) on
the side panel
Front: The MIC LEVEL control on
the front panel
Front+Side1: Adjust with both the
LEVEL knob (left) and the
MIC LEVEL control.
Rear2/WRR Level Side2/Front/Front+Side2 Selects the knob that adjusts the
audio levels of a wireless
microphone and a device connected
to the AUDIO IN CH-2 connector
on the rear panel.
Side2: The LEVEL knob (right) on
the side panel
Front: The MIC LEVEL control on
the front panel
Front+Side2: Adjust with both the
LEVEL knob (right) and the
MIC LEVEL control.
Audio CH3 Level Side3/Front/Front+Side3 Selects the knob that adjusts the
level of audio recorded on channel
3.
Side3: The LEVEL knob on side
panel
Front: The MIC LEVEL control on
the front panel
Front+Side3: Adjust with both the
LEVEL knob and the MIC
LEVEL control.
Audio CH4 Level Side4/Front/Front+Side4 Selects the knob that adjusts the
level of audio recorded on channel
4.
Side4: The LEVEL knob on side
panel
Front: The MIC LEVEL control on
the front panel
Front+Side4: Adjust with both the
LEVEL knob and the MIC
LEVEL control.
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
140
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
WRR Setting
Makes settings related
to the wireless tuner.
WRR Valid CH Sel All/CH1 Selects whether to enable channels 1
and 2 of the wireless receiver (All)
or channel 1 only (CH1).
WRR CH Select TX1/TX2 Specifies the target channel for other
sub-items.
TX1: Channel 1
TX2: Channel 2
WRR Delay Comp On/Off Enables (On) or disables (Off) delay
compensation for wireless audio
input. (When On is selected, the
audio in all E-E output is delayed by
about 8 ms.)
TX --- Displays the name of the transmitter
whose signals are being received on
the channel selected by WRR CH
SELECT.
TX Audio Peak ---/Peak Displays whether the AF level of the
transmitter whose signals are being
received on the channel selected by
WRR CH SELECT are over peak.
TX Input Level ---/Mic/Line Displays whether the input level of
the transmitter whose signals are
being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH SELECT is
set to microphone (Mic) or line
(Line).
TX ATT Level --- Sets the ATT level of the transmitter
whose signals are being received on
the channel selected by WRR CH
SELECT. (The setting range varies
depending on the transmitter.)
TX LCF Frequency --- Sets the low cut filter frequency of
the transmitter whose signals are
being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH SELECT.
(The setting range varies depending
on the transmitter.)
TX System Delay Auto/0.0ms to 8.0ms Specifies the amount of audio delay.
Auto: Automatically adjusts the
amount of delay so that the
delay in the audio received
from the wireless transmitter is
zero.
0.0ms to 8.0ms: Sets the amount of
anticipated wireless system
delay, for cases in which
several wireless systems are
being used over a devices such
as an audio mixer.
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 141
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Timecode
Makes settings related
to timecode.
TC Out Auto/Generator Selects the source for timecode
output.
Auto: During recording, output
values generated by the
timecode generator, and during
playback output values
obtained by the timecode
reader.
Generator: Output values
generated by the timecode
generator during both recording
and playback.
DF/NDF DF/NDF When the Country setting is other
than [PAL Area], selects drop-frame
mode (DF) or non-drop-frame mode
(NDF).
LTC UBIT Fix/Time Specifies the data recorded in LTC
user bits.
Fix: Record user-specified data.
Time: Record the current time.
Counter Display Counter/Duration Select the method used to reset the
counter value displayed on the
viewfinder screen.
Counter: Continue to increment
until the RESET button is
pressed.
Duration: Reset each time that
recording is started.
Essence Mark
Makes settings related
to shot marks and clip
index picture
thumbnails.
Ret Shot Mark 1 On/Off Specify whether to input Shot
Mark1 marks using the RET button
on the lens.
Ret Shot Mark 2 On/Off Specify whether to input Shot
Mark2 marks using the RET button
on the lens.
Index Pic Pos 0sec to 10sec (in 1 sec
steps)
Specifies which frame to use as the
clip thumbnail image
Find Mode Clip/Rec Start Specify the frame to be cued up
when the PREV or NEXT button is
pressed.
Rec Start: The next frame or the
previous frame where a Rec
Start essence mark is set.
Clip: Pressing the NEXT button
moves to the start frame of the
next clip. Pressing the PREV
button moves to the start frame
of the current clip. (Pressing the
PREV button at the start frame
of the current clip moves to the
start frame of the previous
clip.)
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
142
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Camera Config
Makes settings related
to various camcorder
operations.
Rec Tally Blink On/Off Turns warning flashes by the
TALLY indicator on or off. The
warnings alert you an almost
exhausted battery pack or low
remaining media capacity.
Rec Review 3sec/10sec/Clip Selects the recording review time.
Clip: Review all of the most
recently recorded clip.
HD SDI Remote I/F Off/Chara/G-Tally/
R-Tally
Selects whether to use the function
that enables recording control from
this camcorder of an external device
connected to the HD/SD SDI OUT
connector (HDSDI output). When
the function is used, also selects the
indication that shows whether the
external device is recording.
Off: Do not use the remote
recording control function.
Chara: Indicate by the external
device control indication on the
viewfinder screen.
G-Tally: Indicate by the green tally
indicator in the HDVF series
viewfinder or green tally
indicator on the screen of the
CBK-VF01 viewfinder.
R-Tally: Indicate by the recording/
red tally indicators in the
HDVF series viewfinder or the
special recording mode/
operation status indication on
the screen of the CBK-VF01
viewfinder.
Color Bars Select ARIB/100%/75%/
SMPTE
Selects the color bar type.
User Menu Only On/Off Selects whether to display the
USER menu only (On) or display
the menu list (Off) when the
camcorder enters the menu mode.
RM Common
Memory
On/Off Selects whether to share (On) or not
share (Off) settings between times
when a remote control unit is
connected and times when the
camcorder is used locally.
Note
When a remote control unit is
connected, this setting is disabled.
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 143
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Camera Config
Makes settings related
to various camcorder
operations.
RM Rec Start RM/CAM/PARA For times when a remote control
unit is connected, selects whether
recording start/stop buttons are
enabled on the camcorder or the
remote control unit.
RM: Remote control unit
CAM: Camcorder
PARA: Both
Preset White
Makes settings related
to white balance preset
values.
Color Temp<P> 1500K to 3200K to
50000K
Specifies the white balance preset
value.
Color Temp
Balance<P>
–99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies finer color temperature
settings, for use when satisfactory
video cannot be obtained with Color
Temp<P>.
R Gain <P> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the R gain preset value.
B Gain <P> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the B gain preset value.
AWB Enable <P> On /Off Turns on and off execution of the
AWB (auto white balance) function
when the WHITE BAL switch is set
to PRST.
White Filter
Makes settings related
to filters.
ND Filter
C.Temp
On/Off Turns the function that assigns
electrical CC filters to ND filters on
or off.
ND FLT
C.Temp<1>
3200K/4300K/5600K/
6300K
Selects the color temperature for
when electrical CC filters are
assigned to ND filters.
ND FLT
C.Temp<2-4>
3200K/4300K/5600K/
6300K
Selects the color temperature for
when electrical CC filters are
assigned to ND filters.
Electrical
CC<A>
3200K/4300K/5600K/
6300K
Selects the color temperature for
when the electrical CC filter
switching function is assigned to an
assignable switch.
Electrical
CC<B>
3200K/4300K/5600K/
6300K
Selects the color temperature for
when the electrical CC filter
switching function is assigned to an
assignable switch.
Electrical
CC<C>
3200K/4300K/5600K/
6300K/-----
Selects the color temperature for
when the electrical CC filter
switching function is assigned to an
assignable switch.
Select “----” if you do not want to
use C.
Electrical
CC<D>
3200K/4300K/5600K/
6300K/-----
Selects the color temperature for
when the electrical CC filter
switching function is assigned to an
assignable switch.
Select “----” if you do not want to
use D.
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
144
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
DCC Adjust
Makes settings related
to DCC (dynamic
contrast control).
DCC Function Select DCC/Fix Enables or disables automatic knee
point adjustment when the
OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to
CAM, DCC: ON.
DCC: Automatically adjust the
knee point according to the
luminance of the subject.
Fix: Set the knee point to a fixed
value.
DCC D Range 400%/450%/500%/
550%/600%
Specifies the dynamic range when
the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to
CAM, DCC: ON.
DCC Point –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the DCC minimum knee
point.
DCC Gain –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies gain with respect to the
DCC detected value.
DCC Delay Time –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the DCC control speed
(speed of reaction to changes in the
video).
DCC Peak Filter –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts response sensitivity with
respect to peaks in DCC detected
values.
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 145
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Auto Iris2
Makes settings related
to auto iris.
Iris Window 1/2/3/4/5/6/Var Selects the type of iris detection
window.
Var: Var iab l e
Iris Window Ind On/Off Turns on or off the function that
displays a frame marker for the auto
iris detection window.
Iris Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the level of the auto iris
target value.
Iris APL Ratio –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the mix ratio of auto iris
detection peak value and average
value (available when OPERATION
>TLCS >Mode is set to [Standard]).
Iris Var Width 40 to 500 to 999 Adjusts the width of the detection
window when the setting of Iris
Window is VAR.
Iris Var Height 70 to 500 to 999 Adjusts the height of the detection
window when the setting of Iris
Window is VAR.
Iris Var H Position –479 to 0 to +479 Specifies the horizontal position of
the detection window when the
setting of Iris Window is VAR.
Iris Var V Position –464 to 0 to +464 Specifies the vertical position of the
detection window when the setting
of Iris Window is VAR.
Iris Speed –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the control speed (speed of
reaction to changes in the video).
(Larger values specify quicker
reaction times.)
Clip High Light On/Off Turns on or off the function that
disregards highlights and forces a
flatter reaction to high luminance.
Genlock
Makes settings related
to genlock.
Genlock On/Off Turns the genlock function on or off.
H Phase(HD) –999 to ±0 to +999 Specifies the H phase of HD output
when genlock is enabled.
H Phase(SD) –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the H phase of SD output
when genlock is enabled.
Reference Internal/Genlock Displays the type of reference signal
used by the camcorder.
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
146
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
ND Comp
Makes settings related
to ND filter color
compensation.
Although the
differences are very
slight, each of the built-
in ND filters has
different color
characteristics. When
you switch between ND
filters, the white
balance may be
disturbed. You can
correct for these slight
color differences
automatically by
registering
compensation values
for each filter.
ND Offset Adjust On/Off ND filter color compensation
function.
Clear ND Offset Execute/Cancel Clears ND filter color compensation
values (execute by selecting
Execute).
Lens
Executes auto flange
back adjustment.
Auto FB Adjust Execute/Cancel Executes auto flange back
adjustment, only for supported
lenses (execute by selecting
Execute).
Auto Shading
Executes auto black
shading compensation.
Auto Black Shading Execute/Cancel Executes auto shading
compensation (execute by selecting
Execute).
Reset Black Shading Execute/Cancel Clears black shading compensation
values (execute by selecting
Execute).
Master Gain (TMP) –6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/
6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
Specifies a temporary master gain
value. (The value is the same as the
value selected with the GAIN
switch.)
APR APR(SLS) Execute/Cancel Suppresses white flecks in SLS
mode by executing the automatic
pixel noise reduction function
(execute by selecting Execute).
APR Preset Execute/Cancel Deletes white flecks data that was
added by execution of the APR and
automatic black balance adjustment
functions (execute by selecting
Execute).
Trigger Mode
Makes settings related
to triggers for starting
and stopping recording.
i.LINK Trigger
Mode
Internal/Both/External Select Internal when recording start
and stop operations target SxS
memory cards only. Select External
when they target only devices
connected to the i.LINK (HDV/DV)
or HD/SD SDI OUT connectors.
Select Both when they target both
memory cards and external devices.
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 147
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Network Setting b)
Makes settings for
network connection.
Notes
• The CBK-WA01
Wi-Fi Adapter is
required.
• This item is
disabled (displayed
in grey) during
recording and play.
For details on
network connection,
refer to the
Supplement supplied
in the CD-ROM
(labeled “Manuals for
Solid-State Memory
Camcorder”).
DHCP Enable/Disable Selects whether to acquire the IP
address automatically from a DHCP
server (Enable) or not (Disable).
IP Address 0.0.0.0 to
255.255.255.255
(192.168.1.10)
When DHCP is set to [Disable], sets
the IP address.
Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 to
255.255.255.255
When DHCP is set to [Disable], sets
the subnet mask.
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 to
255.255.255.255
When DHCP is set to [Disable], sets
the default gateway.
User Name admin Sets a desired user name in 1 to 31
alphanumeric characters.
Password pmw-500 (model name) Sets a password (model name) in 0
to 31 alphanumeric characters.
Set Execute/Cancel Confirms the settings in Network
Settings (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
MAC Address Displays the MAC address.
Net Config Reset Execute/Cancel Resets the settings in Network
Settings to the preset values
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
Wi-Fi Setting b)
Makes settings for
Wi-Fi connection.
Notes
• The CBK-WA01
Wi-Fi Adapter is
required.
• This item is
disabled (displayed
in grey) during
recording and play.
For details on Wi-Fi
connection, refer to
the Supplement
supplied in the CD-
ROM (labeled
“Manuals for Solid-
State Memory
Camcorder”).
Scan Networks Execute/Cancel When Wi-Fi is set to [Enable], scan
the available network connection.
SSID Network connection
name
Sets the network connection name
of up to 32 characters.
Network Type Infra/Adhoc Selects the connection mode.
Infra: Infrastructure mode
Adhoc: Ad hoc mode
Ch 1 to 11 When Network Type is set to
[Adhoc], set the wireless channel.
Authentication Open/Shared/WPA/
WPA2
Selects the network authentication.
OPEN: Open system authentication
SHARED: Shared key
authentication
WPA: WPA (Wi-Fi Protected
Access) authentication
WPA2: WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected
Access 2) authentication
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
148
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Wi-Fi Setting b)
Makes settings for
Wi-Fi connection.
Notes
• The CBK-WA01
Wi-Fi Adapter is
required.
• This item is
disabled (displayed
in grey) during
recording and play.
For details on Wi-Fi
connection, refer to
the Supplement
supplied in the CD-
ROM (labeled
“Manuals for Solid-
State Memory
Camcorder”).
Encryption Disable/WEP/TKIP/AES Selects whether to apply data
encryption and the type of data
encryption.
Disable: Do not apply data
encryption.
WEP: Apply WEP (Wired
Equivalent Privacy) when
Authentication is set to [Open]
or [Shared]
TKIP: Apply TKIP (Temporal Key
Integrity Protocol) when
Authentication is set to [WPA]
or [WPA2]
AES: Apply AES (Advanced
Encryption Standard) when
Authentication is set to [WPA]
or [WPA2]
WEP Key Index 1/2/3/4 When Encryption is [WEP], selects
the key index.
Input Select When Encryption is set to
[WEP]: ASCII5,
ASCII13, HEX10,
HEX26
When Encryption is set to
[TKIP] or [AES]:
ASCII8-63, HEX64
Selects the input format depending
on the network key (or security key).
ASCII5: Five characters ASCII
format
ASCII13: 13 characters ASCII
format
HEX10: 10 hexadecimal digits
HEX26: 26 hexadecimal digits
ASCII8-63: 8 to 63 characters
ASCII 8-bit format
HEX64: 64 hexadecimal digits
(characters)
Key Sets the network key (or security
key).
Set Enables settings for Wi-Fi Setting
when Wi-Fi is set to [Enable]
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
Wi-Fi Status xxxxx
Connecting
Displays “Connecting” while
connection is being attempted.
Displays black squares to show the
connection status by the number of
squares when the camcorder is
connected to a computer or a LAN.
Wireless Mode 802.11b/802.11g/802.11n Displays an IEEE802.11 standard.
Wi-Fi Enable/Disable Selects whether to enable or disable
Wi-Fi connection.
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 149
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
a) When the optional CBK-HD02 is installed
b) When the optional CBK-UPG01 is installed
Clock Set
Sets the internal clock.
Date/Time Sets the current date and time.
12H/24H 12H/24H Selects the 12-hour format (12H) or
the 24-hour format (24H) for
display of times.
Date Mode YYMMDD/MMDDYY/
DDMMYY
Selects the display format for dates.
YYMMDD: Year, Month, Day
MMDDYY: Month, Day, Year
DDMMYY: Day, Month Year
Language
Selects the language for
messages.
Language English/Chinese Selects the language for messages
from English or Chinese.
Hours Meter
Makes settings related
to the digital hours
meter.
Hours(Sys) Displays the cumulative hours of
use (cannot be reset).
Hours(Reset) Displays the hours of use (can be
reset).
Reset Execute/Cancel Resets Hours(Reset) to 0.
(Execute by selecting Execute.)
Version
Displays the version of
the camcorder, and
updates the camcorder.
Version Displays the software version of the
camcorder (Vx.xx).
CBK-HD02 a) Displays the software version of the
CBK-HD02 (Vx.xx).
Version Up Execute/Cancel Updates the camcorder (execute by
selecting Execute).
Note
This cannot be selected unless an SxS
memory card is inserted.
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
150
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Settings in bold are the factory default values.
FILE Menu
FILE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
User
Makes settings for
operating user files.
User Load SxS Execute/Cancel Loads a user file from an SxS
memory card (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
When Load Customize Data is set
to [Off]: Replace the current
USER menu settings with
settings stored in the loaded use
file (with the original menu
configuration unchanged).
When Load Customize Data is set
to [On]: Replace the current
USER menu configuration and
settings with those stored in the
loaded use file.
When User Load White is set to
[Off]: Load a user file
excluding white balance data.
User Load White is set to [On]:
Load a user file including white
balance data.
User Save SxS Execute/Cancel Stores the current USER menu
configuration and settings including
the white balance data to an SxS
memory card as a user file (execute
by selecting [Execute]).
User Load USB (in UDF mode only) Loads a user file from a USB flash
drive (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
User Save USB (in UDF mode only) Stores the current USER menu
configuration and settings including
the white balance data to a USB
flash drive as a user file (execute by
selecting [Execute]).
File ID Assigns a name to a file. Names can
be up to 16 characters in length.
Recall User Preset Execute/Cancel Returns the current USER menu
settings to the preset values (execute
by selecting [Execute]).
Store User Preset Execute/Cancel Stores the USER menu as a user file
in which all menu settings are reset
to the preset values (execute by
selecting [Execute]).
Clear User Preset Execute/Cancel Returns the current USER menu
settings to the factory default
settings (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
Menu List 151
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
User
Makes settings for
operating user files.
Load Customize
Data
Off/On Selects whether to load both menu
configuration and settings (On) or
load only menu settings (Off) white
balance data when loading a user
file.
User
Makes settings for
operating user files.
Load White Data Off/On Selects whether to load (On) or not
load (Off) white balance data when
loading a user file.
All
Makes settings related
to ALL file operations.
Display Mode Date&Time/Model
Name
Selects the items to be displayed in
the list box that appears when a file
is saved or loaded.
All Load(SxS) Execute/Cancel Loads an ALL file from an SxS
memory card (execute by selecting
Execute).
All Save(SxS) Execute/Cancel Stores an ALL file to an SxS
memory card (execute by selecting
Execute).
All Load(USB)
(in UDF mode only)
Execute/Cancel Loads an ALL file from a USB flash
drive (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
All Save(USB)
(in UDF mode only)
Execute/Cancel Stores an ALL file to a USB flash
drive (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
File ID Assigns a name to a file. Names can
be up to 16 characters in length.
All Preset Execute/Cancel Returns all items to their preset
values (execute by selecting
Execute).
Store All Preset Execute/Cancel Stores the current settings of all
items as the preset values (execute
by selecting [Execute]).
Clear All Preset Execute/Cancel Clears the preset values of all items
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
3Sec Clr Preset On/Off Turns on or off the function that
clears each preset value when the
MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch is pushed up and held for
three seconds on the CANCEL/
PRST side.
Network Data Off/On Selects whether to load (On) or not
load (Off) network settings when
loading an ALL file.
FILE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
152
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Scene
Makes settings related
to scene file operations.
s1 Standard File number and file ID
s2 Standard File number and file ID
s3 Standard File number and file ID
s4 Standard File number and file ID
s5 Standard File number and file ID
sStandard Standard settings
Display Mode Date&Time/Model
Name
Selects the items to be displayed in
the list box that appears when a file
is saved or loaded.
Scene Recall Mem Execute/Cancel Loads a file from internal memory
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
Scene Store Mem Execute/Cancel Stores a file in internal memory
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
Scene Recall SxS Execute/Cancel Loads a file from an SxS memory
card (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
Scene Store SxS Execute/Cancel Stores a file to an SxS memory card
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
Scene Recall USB
(in UDF mode only)
Execute/Cancel Loads a file from a USB flash drive
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
Scene Store USB
(in UDF mode only)
Execute/Cancel Stores a file to a USB flash drive
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
File ID Assigns a name to a file. Names can
be up to 16 characters in length.
Reference
Makes settings related
to reference file
operations.
Reference Store Execute/Cancel Stores the current settings of
reference file items in the reference
file that is maintained in internal
memory (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
Reference Clear Execute/Cancel Clear the reference file (execute by
selecting [Execute]).
Refer Load(SxS) Execute/Cancel Load a reference file from an SxS
memory card (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
Refer Save(SxS) Execute/Cancel Store a reference file to an SxS
memory card (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
Refer Load(USB)
(in UDF mode only)
Execute/Cancel Loads a file from a USB flash drive
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
Refer Store(USB)
(in UDF mode only)
Execute/Cancel Stores a file to a USB flash drive
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
File ID Assigns a name to a file. Names can
be up to 16 characters in length.
Scene White Data On/Off Selects whether to load (On) or not
load (Off) white balance data when
Scene >Scene Recall or Scene
>Standard is executed.
FILE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 153
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Lens
Makes settings related
to lens file operations.
Display Mode Date&Time/Model
Name
Selects the items to be displayed in
the list box that appears when a file
is saved or loaded.
Lens Recall Mem Execute/Cancel Loads a file from internal memory
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
Lens Store Mem Execute/Cancel Stores a file in internal memory
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
Lens Recall SxS Execute/Cancel Loads a file from an SxS memory
card (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
Lens Store SxS Execute/Cancel Stores a file to an SxS memory card
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
Lens Recall USB
(in UDF mode only)
Execute/Cancel Loads a file from a USB flash drive
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
Lens Store USB
(in UDF mode only)
Execute/Cancel Stores a file to a USB flash drive
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
File ID Assigns a name to the most recently
loaded file. Names can be up to 16
characters in length.
Source Displays the number of the selected
file.
Lens No Offset Execute/Cancel Clears a file (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
Lens Auto Recall Off/On/Serial Number When the installed lens supports
serial communication, specifies
whether to automatically load that
reference file.
Off: Do not use this function.
On: Load the reference for the
model name and reflect the
contents of the file.
Serial Number: For lenses that
support serial number
communication, load the lens
file that corresponds to the
serial number and model name,
and reflect the contents of that
file. For lenses that do not
support serial number
communication, load the
reference for the model name
(in the same way as when On is
selected).
Serial Number Displays the serial number of the
installed lens (only for lenses that
support serial communication).
Lens ID Displays the model name of the
installed lens (only for lenses that
support serial communication).
FILE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
154
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Lens
Makes settings related
to lens file operations.
L Manufacturer Displays the name of the
manufacturer of the installed lens
(only for lenses that support serial
communication).
M V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a vertical SAW shading
compensation value in the lens file.
Lens Center H –40 to 0 to 40 Sets a center marker horizontal
position in the lens file.
Lens Center V –40 to 0 to 40 Sets a center marker vertical
position in the lens file.
Lens R Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a R flare level in the lens file.
Lens G Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a G flare level in the lens file.
Lens B Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a B flare level in the lens file.
Lens W-R Offset –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a R white balance
compensation value in the lens file.
Lens W-B Offset –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a B white balance
compensation value in the lens file.
Shading Ch Sel Red/Green/Blue Selects the white shading
compensation target.
L R/G/B H Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a horizontal SAW white
shading compensation value in the
lens file.
L R/G/B H Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a horizontal parabola white
shading compensation value in the
lens file.
L R/G/B V Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a vertical SAW white shading
compensation value in the lens file.
L R/G/B V Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a vertical parabola white
shading compensation value in the
lens file.
FILE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches 155
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Using the Assignable SW item of the OPERATION menu, you can assign user-specified functions to the
ASSIGN. 0 to 3 switches, the ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 switches, the COLOR TEMP. button, and the RET
button on the lens.
The following tables lists the functions that are assigned when the camcorder is shipped from the factory.
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches
Switch or button Function Assignable SW setting
ASSIGN. 0 switch No assignment Off
ASSIGN. 1 switch No assignment Off
ASSIGN. 2 switch No assignment Off
ASSIGN. 3 switch No assignment Off
ASSIGNABLE 4 switch No assignment Off
ASSIGNABLE 5 switch No assignment Off
RET button During recording or playback: Write a shot mark.
In the other states: Conduct a recording review
(if playback is allowed).
Lens RET
COLOR TEMP. button Adjust the white balance with the preset white
balance value of 5600K.
Color Temp SW 5600K
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 0 Switch
Assignable switch setting Function State when camcorder
is next powered on
Off No assignment —
Marker Turn the display of all markers on or off. Setting retained
ATW Hold Hold the white balance setting in the ATW (auto-tracking
white balance) mode
—
Picture Cache Turn the picture cache function on or off. Setting retained
Freeze Mix Execute the freeze mix function. —
Focus Mag Turn the focus magnification function on or off. Setting not retained
Zebra Turn zebra display on or off. Setting not retained
Shot Mark1 Write Shot Mark1. —
Shot Mark2 Write Shot Mark2. —
OK Mark Add or delete an OK mark. —
Clip Flag OK Add/clear an OK mark to/from the clip being recorded or
played.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag NG Add/clear an NG mark to/from the clip being recorded or
played.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag Keep Add/clear a KP mark to/from the clip being recorded or
played.
Setting not retained
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches
156
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Note
Immediately after you assign a function to the ASSIGN. 2 switch or you switch the recording format, the setting of the
switch at that point may not match the camcorder’s internal state. After assigning a function, switch the ASSIGN. 2
switch or power the camcorder off and on again.
Note
a) When Picture Cache is assigned, OPERATION >Rec
Function in the setup menu is disabled (displayed in
grey) to keep the setting unchanged.
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 2 Switch
Assignable switch setting Function
Off No assignment
Front Mic Switch between stereo and monaural when a stereo microphone is connected.
Marker Turn the display of all markers on or off.
Picture Cache a) Turn the picture cache function on or off.
Zebra Turn zebra display on or off.
Clip Continuous Rec Turn the Clip Continuous Rec mode on or off.
Digital Extender Turn the screen magnification function on or off when the optional CBK-HD02
SDI/COMPOSITE Input and 50 Pin Interface is installed.
Rec Source Switch the signals to be recorded between the camera picture and external input
when the optional CBK-HD02 SDI/COMPOSITE Input and 50 Pin Interface is
installed. (if the unit is currently conducting recording or play, the switch takes
effect after the recording or playback ends.)
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 1 and 3 Switches, the
ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 Switches, and the COLOR TEMP. Button
Assignable switch setting Function State when camcorder
is next powered on
Off No assignment —
Front Mic Switch between stereo (On) and monaural (Off) when a
stereo microphone is connected.
Setting retained
Marker Turn the display of all markers on or off. Setting retained
Last Clip Delete Delete the most recently recorded clip. —
ATW Turn ATW (auto tracing white balance) mode on or off. Setting not retained
ATW Hold Hold the white balance setting in the ATW mode. —
EZ Mode Execute EZ mode according to the setting of
OPERATION >TLCS.
Setting retained
Turbo Gain Execute Turbo Gain according to the setting of
OPERATION >Gain Switch >Gain Turbo.
Setting not retained
Rec Review Conduct a recording review. —
Rec Start or stop recording. —
Picture Cache Turn the picture cache function on or off. Setting retained
Freeze Mix Execute the freeze mix function. Setting not retained
Spotlight Turn the spotlight function in auto iris mode on or off. Setting retained
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches 157
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Backlight Turn the backlight function in auto iris mode on or off. Setting retained
EVF Mode Switch the viewfinder screen between B&W (On) and
color (Off).
Setting retained
BRT Disp Turn the display of the brightness level on or off. Setting retained
Histogram Turn the histogram display on or off. Setting retained
Lens Info Switch the depth of field indication between off,
displayed in meters, and displayed in feet.
Setting retained
Zoom Tele/Wide When a lens that supports serial communication is
installed, assign the Zoom Tele function to
ASSIGNABLE 4, and assign the Zoom Wide function to
ASSIGNABLE 5 (displayed only when <4> and <5> are
set).
—
Zoom Wide/Tele When a lens that supports serial communication is
installed, assign the Zoom Wide function to
ASSIGNABLE 4, and assign the Zoom Tele function to
ASSIGNABLE 5 (displayed only when <4> and <5> are
set).
—
Manual Focus Assist Turn the manual focus assist function on or off. Setting retained
Focus Mag Turn the focus magnification function on or off. Setting not retained
Zebra Turn zebra display on or off. Setting not retained
Lens RET Display return video signals when the optional CBK-
HD02 is installed and a camera extension unit is
connected.
When a camera extension unit is not connected, function
as follows.
During recording or playback: Write a shot mark.
In the other states: Conduct a recording review
(if playback is allowed).
—
Return Video Display return video signals when the optional CBK-
HD02 is installed and a camera extension unit is
connected.
—
Shot Mark1 Write Shot Mark1. —
Shot Mark2 Write Shot Mark2. —
OK Mark Add or delete an OK mark. —
Clip Flag OK Add/Clear an OK mark to/from the clip being recorded
or played.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag NG Add/Clear an NG mark to/from the clip being recorded
or played.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag Keep Add/Clear a KP mark to/from the clip being recorded or
played.
Setting not retained
Color Temp SW 3200K Adjust the white balance with a 3200K preset value. Setting retained
Color Temp SW 4300K Adjust the white balance with a 4300K preset value. Setting retained
Color Temp SW 5600K Adjust the white balance with a 5600K preset value. Setting retained
Color Temp SW 6300K Adjust the white balance with a 6300K preset value. Setting retained
Assignable switch setting Function State when camcorder
is next powered on
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches
158
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Electrical CC Function that switches the electrical CC filter (3200K/
4300K/5600K/6300K) applied to white balance
adjustment values.
Each press of the switch or button switches in the order
3200Kt4300Kt5600Kt6300K.
These can also be applied from a menu (apply with
Electrical CC<A><B><C><D>).
Note
This function is not available when Maintenance >White
Filter >ND Filter C.Temp in the setup menu is set to On.
If you set ND Filter C.Temp to On after assigning the
function, the assignable switch ceases to function.
Setting retained
CC5600K Apply a 5600K electrical CC filter to white balance
adjustment values.
Setting retained
Clip Continuous Rec Turn the Clip Continuous Rec mode on or off. Setting not retained
Digital Extender Turn the screen magnification function on or off when
the optional CBK-HD02 SDI/COMPOSITE Input and 50
Pin Interface is installed.
Setting not retained
Assignable switch setting Function State when camcorder
is next powered on
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches 159
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the RET Button on the Lens
Assignable switch setting Function State when camcorder
is next powered on
Off No assignment —
Lens RET Display return video signals when the optional CBK-
HD02 is installed and a camera extension unit is
connected.
When a camera extension unit is not connected, function
as follows.
During recording or playback: Write a shot mark.
In the other states: Conduct a recording review (if
playback is allowed).
—
Return Video Display return video signals when the optional CBK-
HD02 is installed and a camera extension unit is
connected.
—
Rec Review Execute recording review. —
Shot Mark1 Write Shot Mark1. —
Shot Mark2 Write Shot Mark2. —
Clip Flag OK Add/Clear an OK mark to/from the clip being recorded or
played.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag NG Add/Clear an NG mark to/from the clip being recorded or
played.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag Keep Add/Clear a KP mark to/from the clip being recorded or
played.
Setting not retained
OK Mark Add or delete an OK mark. —
Focus Mag Turn the focus magnification function on or off. Setting not retained
Saving and Loading Settings
160
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
You can save setup menu settings in the
camcorder’s internal memory and on SxS
memory cards or USB flash drives (in UDF
mode). This allows you to quickly recall an
appropriate set of menu settings for the current
situation.
Setting data is saved in the following categories.
User files: User files save customized USER
menu setting items and setting data. You can
save up to 64 user files on SxS memory cards
and on USB flash drives (in UDF mode).
You can set up the USER menu to a
customized state by reading one of these files
into the unit’s memory.
ALL files: ALL files save the setting data of all
menus. You can save up to 64 ALL files on
an SxS memory card or a USB flash drive (in
UDF mode).
Note
Device specific data (shading, output levels, and
other data that requires adjustment for the specific
device) is not saved.
Scene files: Scene file save adjustments to
PAINT menu items for the purpose of
shooting a particular scene. You can save up
to five scene files in the camcorder’s internal
memory and up to 64 scene files on an SxS
memory card or a USB flash drive (in UDF
mode).
Reference files: Reference files save the
reference values that are set when you
execute FILE >Scene > Standard in the setup
menu. You can save one reference file in the
camcorder’s internal memory and one on an
SxS memory card or a USB flash drive (in
UDF mode).
Lens files: Lens files save the setting data used to
compensate for lens characteristics, such as
flare, white shading, white balance and
center markers. You can save up to 32 lens
files in the camcorder’s internal memory and
up to 64 lens files on an SxS memory card or
a USB flash drive (in UDF mode).
The first settings stored in a file are called
“preset” values.
Even after loading files to set up the camcorder,
and overwriting original files with new settings,
you can still recover preset values and reset files
to their initial states (see page 162).
This section explains how to save setting data in
an ALL file.
Before starting, insert a writable SxS memory
card into a memory card slot.
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 109) for
information about menu operations.
1Select FILE >All in the setup menu.
To assign a name to the data before saving
it
Assign a name before proceeding to step 2.
For details, see “To assign names to files”
(page 161).
2Select All Save(SxS) >Execute.
An ALL file list box appears.
File numbers where “No File” is displayed
are empty file numbers. File numbers with a
file name or a date and time are the number
of files that already contain data.
3Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired file number.
4Press the MENU knob.
A confirmation message appears.
5To execute the save, select [Execute],
and then press the MENU knob.
To cancel the save, select [Cancel], and
then press the MENU knob.
If you choose to execute the save, the
ACCESS lamp lights (in blue on the right-
Chapter7
Saving and Loading User Setting Data
Saving and Loading
Settings
Saving Setting Data
Saving and Loading Settings 161
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
side panel and in orange in the card slot
section). A completion message appears and
the ACCESS lamp goes out when the data
has been saved.
If an error message appears
One of the following error messages may appear
during execution of the save, or as soon as you
select [Execute]. In this case, the file is not saved
to the SxS memory card.
When using a USB flash drive (in UDF mode)
Connect a formatted USB flash drive (see
page 73) to the external device connector.
Select All Save(USB) >Execute in step 2.
To assign names to files
Assigning a name before you save data in an ALL
file can make it easier to distinguish your files.
The following characters can be used in file
names.
Alphanumeric characters (a–z, A–Z, 0–9) and
special characters ( ! # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < =
> ? @ [ \ ] ~)
1Select FILE >All >File ID in the setup
menu.
2Turn the MENU knob to select a
character, and then press the MENU
knob.
3Repeat step 3.
4When you have finished entering
characters, press the MENU knob to
move the cursor to “SET”, and then
press the MENU knob.
The specified name is displayed.
When you save the file (see page 160), the
data will be saved under this name.
Note
When you load a file from an SxS memory card or a USB
flash drive (in UDF mode), the data saved in the
camcorder’s internal memory is overwritten.
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 109) for
information about menu operations.
1Select FILE >All in the setup menu.
2Select All Load(SxS) >Execute.
A list box of ALL files appears.
File numbers where “No File” is displayed
are empty file numbers. File numbers with a
file name or a date and time are the number
of files that already contain data.
3Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired file number.
4Press the MENU knob.
A confirmation message appears.
5To execute the load, select [Execute],
and then press the MENU knob.
To cancel the load, select [Cancel], and
then press the MENU knob.
If you choose to execute the load, the
ACCESS lamp lights (in blue on the right-
side panel and in orange in the card slot
section). The ACCESS lamp goes out and a
completion message appears when the data
has been loaded.
If an error message appears
One of the following error messages may appear
during execution of the load, or as soon as you
select [Execute]. In this case, the file is not loaded
from the SxS memory card.
When using a USB flash drive (in UDF mode)
Connect a formatted USB flash drive (see
page 73) to the external device connector.
Select All Load(USB) >Execute in step 2.
Error message Problem What to do
NG:Cannot Save No recordable
media is
inserted.
Insert
recordable
media.
NG:Media Full The media is
full.
Use media with
free capacity
remaining.
Loading Setting Data
Error message Problem What to do
NG:No Data • There is no
readable media
• The specified
file does not
exist on the
media
Insert the
media that
contains the
file you want.
Saving and Loading Scene Files
162
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 109) for
information about menu operations.
1Select FILE >All in the setup menu.
2Select [All Preset], and then press the
MENU knob.
3To execute the reset, select [Execute],
and then press the MENU knob.
To cancel the reset, select [Cancel], and
then press the MENU knob.
If you choose to execute the reset, all settings
in the ALL file are reset to preset values.
Scene files allow you to save the following types
of data.
• Values set in the PAINT menu
• Shutter speeds set in standard mode or ECS
mode
• White balance data
The data that is saved and loaded depends on the
setting of FILE >Reference >Scene White Data
in the setup menu.
To save a scene file to an SxS memory card, insert
the card into a memory card slot and then proceed
as follows.
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 109) for
information about menu operations.
1Select FILE >Scene in the setup menu.
To assign a name to the data before saving
it
Assign a name before proceeding to step 2.
For details, see “To assign names to files”
(page 161).
2Select Scene Store Mem >Excute (if you
want to save the data in the camcorder’s
internal memory), or select Scene Store
SxS >Execute (if you want to save the
data on an SxS memory card).
3Press the MENU knob.
A list box of scene files appears.
File numbers where “No File” is displayed
are empty file numbers
4Select the file number under which you
want to save the data, and then press the
MENU knob.
A confirmation message appears.
Resetting a File after Changing Its
Contents Saving and Loading
Scene Files
Saving Scene Files
Saving and Loading Scene Files 163
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
5To execute the save, select [Execute],
and then press the MENU knob.
To cancel the save, select [Cancel], and
then press the MENU knob.
If you selected Scene Store SxS >Execute in
step 2, the ACCESS lamp lights (in blue on
the right-side panel and in orange in the card
slot section) when you execute the save.
When the data has been saved, a completion
message appears and the ACCESS lamp goes
out.
When using a USB flash drive (in UDF mode)
Connect a formatted USB flash drive (see
page 73) to the external device connector.
Select Scene Store USB >Execute in step 2.
To load a scene file from an SxS memory card,
insert the SxS memory card into a memory card
slot, and then proceed as follows.
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 109) for
information about menu operations.
1Select FILE >Scene in the setup menu.
2Select Scene Recall Mem >Execute (if
you want to load the file from the
camcorder’s internal memory), and
select Scene Recall SxS >Execute (if you
want to load the file from an SxS
memory card).
3Press the MENU knob.
A list box of scene files appears. File
numbers where “No File” is displayed are
empty file numbers.
4Select the desired file number, and then
press the MENU knob.
A confirmation message appears.
5To execute the load, select [Execute],
and then press the MENU knob.
To cancel the load, select [Cancel], and
then press the MENU knob.
If you selected Scene Recall SxS >Execute in
step 2, the ACCESS lamp lights (in blue on
the right-side panel and in orange in the card
slot section) when you execute the load.
When the data has been loaded, a completion
message appears and the ACCESS lamp goes
out.
When using a USB flash drive (in UDF mode)
Connect a formatted USB flash drive (see
page 73) to the external device connector.
Select Scene Recall USB >Execute in step 2.
Loading Scene Files
Saving and Loading Lens Files
164
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
Use FILE >Lens (see page 153) in the setup menu
to set the data in lens files.
You can set the following data and save it as a
lens file.
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 109) for
information about menu operations.
To save a lens file to an SxS memory card, insert
the card into a memory card slot and then proceed
as follows.
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 109) for
information about menu operations.
1Select FILE >Lens in the setup menu.
To assign a name to the data before saving
it
Assign a name before proceeding to step 2.
For details, see “To assign names to files”
(page 161).
2Select Lens Store Mem >Execute (if you
want to save the data in the camcorder’s
internal memory), and select Lens Store
SxS >Execute (if you want to save the
data on an SxS memory card).
3Press the MENU knob.
If you select [Execute], a list box of lens file
number appears. File numbers where “No
File” is displayed are empty file numbers.
4Select the file number under which you
want to save the data, and then press the
MENU knob.
A confirmation message appears.
5To execute the save, select [Execute],
and then press the MENU knob.
To cancel the save, select [Cancel], and
then press the MENU knob.
If you selected Lens Store SxS >Execute in
step 2, the ACCESS lamp lights (in blue on
the right-side panel and in orange in the card
slot section) when you execute the save.
When the data has been saved, a completion
message appears and the ACCESS lamp goes
out.
When using a USB flash drive (in UDF mode)
Connect a formatted USB flash drive (see
page 73) to the external device connector.
Select Lens Store USB >Execute in step 2.
To load a lens file from an SxS memory card,
insert the SxS memory card into a memory card
slot, and then proceed as follows.
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 109) for
information about menu operations.
1Select FILE >Lens in the setup menu.
2Select Lens Recall Mem >Execute (if
you want to load the file from the
camcorder’s internal memory), and
select Lens Recall SxS >Execute (if you
want to load the file from an SxS
memory card).
3Press the MENU knob.
If you select [Execute], a list box of lens files
appears. File numbers where “No File” is
displayed are empty file numbers.
Saving and Loading
Lens Files
Setting Lens File Data
Setting data Sub-items
V modulation shading
compensation values
M V Modulation
Center marker position Lens Center H
Lens Center V
Flare level Lens R Flare
Lens G Flare
Lens B Flare
White balance
compensation value
Lens W-R Offset
Lens W-B Offset
White shading
compensation value
L R/G/B H Saw
L R/G/B H Para
L R/G/B V Saw
L R/G/B V Para
Saving Lens Files
Loading Lens Files
Saving and Loading User Files 165
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
4Select the desired file number, and then
press the MENU knob.
A confirmation message appears.
5To execute the load, select [Execute],
and then press the MENU knob.
To cancel the load, select [Cancel], and
then press the MENU knob.
If you selected Lens Recall SxS >Execute in
step 2, the ACCESS lamp lights (in blue on
the right-side panel and in orange in the card
slot section) when you execute the load.
When the specified lens file has been loaded,
a completion message appears and the
ACCESS lamp goes out.
When using a USB flash drive (in UDF mode)
Connect a formatted USB flash drive (see
page 73) to the external device connector.
Select Lens Recall USB >Execute in step 2.
When you are using a lens that support serial
communication, you can set up the camcorder by
automatically loading the lens file that
corresponds to the lens settings (Lens Auto Recall
function).
To use the Lens Auto Recall function, set FILE
>Lens >Lens Auto Recall in the setup menu to
one of the following.
On: Load the lens file that corresponds to the
model name.
Off: Do not use the Lens Auto Recall function.
Serial Number: Load the lens file that
corresponds to the model name and serial
number (when the lens supports
communication of the serial number).
If the lens does not support communication of the
serial number, both settings load the lens file that
corresponds to the model name.
You can save the customized USER menu
configuration and settings along with white
balance data as user files.
To save a user file to an SxS memory card, insert
the card into a memory card slot and then proceed
as follows.
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 109) for
information about menu operations.
1Select FILE >User in the setup menu.
To assign a name to the data before saving
it
Assign a name before proceeding to step 2.
For details, see “To assign names to files”
(page 161).
2Select User Save SxS >Execute.
A user file list box appears.
File numbers where “No File” is displayed
are empty file numbers. File numbers with a
file name or a date and time are the number
of files that already contain data.
3Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired file number.
4Press the MENU knob.
A confirmation message appears.
5To execute the save, select [Execute],
and then press the MENU knob. To
cancel the save, select [Cancel], and
then press the MENU knob.
If you choose to execute the save, the
ACCESS lamp lights (in blue on the right-
side panel and in orange in the card slot
section). A completion message appears and
the ACCESS lamp goes out when the data
has been saved.
Loading Lens Files Automatically
Saving and Loading
User Files
Saving User Files
Saving and Loading User Files
166
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
Saving the USER menu as a user file in
which all menu settings are reset to the
preset values
Select Store User Preset >Execute in step 2.
When using a USB flash drive (in UDF
mode)
Connect a formatted USB flash drive (see
page 73) to the external device connector.
Select User Save USB >Execute in step 2.
The ACCESS lamp does not light while the
save is being executed in step 5.
Note
When you load a file from an SxS memory card or a USB
flash drive (in UDF mode) , the data saved in the
camcorder’s internal memory is overwritten.
Depending on the settings of Use Load
Customize Data and User Load White under
FILE >User in the setup menu
When Load Customize Data is set to [Off]:
Only USER menu settings are loaded.
When Load Customize Data is set to [On]:
USER menu configuration and settings are
loaded.
When User Load White is set to [Off]: White
balance data is not loaded.
When User Load White is set to [On]: White
balance data is loaded.
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 109) for
information about menu operations.
1Select FILE >User in the setup menu.
2Select User Load SxS >Execute.
A list box of user files appears.
File numbers where “No File” is displayed
are empty file numbers. File numbers with a
file name or a date and time are the number
of files that already contain data.
3Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired file number.
4Press the MENU knob.
A confirmation message appears.
5To execute the load, select [Execute],
and then press the MENU knob. To
cancel the load, select [Cancel], and
then press the MENU knob.
If you choose to execute the load, the
ACCESS lamp lights (in blue on the right-
side panel and in orange in the card slot
section). The ACCESS lamp goes out and a
completion message appears when the data
has been loaded.
When using a USB flash drive (in UDF mode)
Connect a formatted USB flash drive (see
page 73) to the external device connector.
Select User Load USB >Execute in step 2.
The ACCESS lamp does not light while the save
is being executed in step 5.
Loading Setting Data
Connecting External Monitors 167
Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices
You can connect an RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit and operate this camcorder. For connection and
operation of the RM-B150/B750, refer to the Supplement supplied in the CD-ROM (labeled “Manuals for
Solid-State Memory Camcorder”).
Select the output signal and use an appropriate cable for the monitor to be connected.
Regardless of whether the signal is HD or SD, the
same status information and menus can be
displayed on the external monitor as those on the
viewfinder screen.
Note
SD signals down-converted for output have the
following restrictions:
Images of 50P/50i/25P are output as PAL signals, those
of 59.94P/59.94i/29.97P are output as NTSC signals, and
those of 23.98P are output as 2-3 pulled-down NTSC
signals.
Chapter8
Connecting External Devices
Connecting External Monitors
BNC cable (not supplied)
BNC cable (not supplied)
Connecting External Monitors
168
Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices
HD/SD SDI OUT connector (BNC)
The HD/SD SDI OUT connector can be used to
connect a device that supports SDI. The device
type can be a monitor, switcher, or VTR or other
recording device.
The output from this connector can be turned on
and off with OPERATION >Input/Output >SDI
Output in the setup menu (see page 114).
For connection, use a BNC cable (not supplied).
VIDEO OUT connector
The VIDEO OUT connector can be used to
connect a device that supports analog composite
signal. The device type can be a monitor or VTR
or other recording device.
The output signal varies as shown in the
following table depending on the setting of
OPERATION >Output&i.LINK in the setup
menu.
a) Use OPERATION >Format >Country (see page 113)
in the setup menu to switch between NTSC and PAL.
To input the VIDEO OUT connector output
signal to an external analog composite device, it
may be necessary to change the input signal
setting of that external device to be matched with
the analog composite signal setting for the
VIDEO OUT connector.
To input camcorder output audio to an external
device such as a monitor or VTR or other
recording device, connect the audio output of the
AUDIO OUT connector to the audio input of that
external device.
For connection, use a BNC cable (not supplied).
i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector
In FAT mode, i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector
supports HDV and DV input/output. However,
DV streams cannot be recorded on this
camcorder.
This connector can be used to connect a device
that supports i.LINK (HDV). The device type can
be a monitor, read/write device such as VTR or
HDD, or computer.
To input/output HDV signals
HDV input/output is supported when the video
format is an HDV compatible format (SP 1440/
59.94i, SP 1440/50i, or SP 1440/23.98P), Input/
Output >Output&i.LINK in the OPERATION
menu is set to [HD&HDV] or [SD&HDV], and
Input/Output >i.LINK I/O is set to [Enable].
When the video format is SP 1440/23.98P, a
59.94i HDV signal subjected to 2-3 pulldown
processing is output.
To input/output DV signals
DV input/output is supported under either of the
following conditions.
• Input/Output >i.LINK I/O in the OPERATION
menu is set to [Enable] on SD mode.
• On HD mode, the video format is other than DV
incompatible formats (HQ 1920/23.98P, HQ
1440/23.98P, and HQ 1280/23.98P), Input/
Output >Output&i.LINK is set to [SD&DV],
and Input/Output >i.LINK I/O is set to
[Enable].
Setting Output signal
HD&HDV (in FAT
mode)
HD (in UDF mode)
HD-Y analog signal which
has the same video format
with the signal output from
the HD/SD SDI OUT
connector.
SD&HDV or
SD&DV (in FAT
mode)
SD (in UDF mode)
Composite signal which has
the same video format with
the signal output from the
HD/SD SDI OUT connector.
When OPERATION
>Format >HD/SD in the
setup menu is [SD], the
output composite signal is
the same as the NTSC or
PAL encoded signal that is
output from the HD/SD SDI
OUT connector a).
Operating Clips with a Computer 169
Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices
The clips recorded on SxS memory cards with
this camcorder can be controlled on a computer or
edited using the optional nonlinear editing
software.
For these purposes, the clips on an SxS memory
card can be operated by directly loading the card
in a computer or by connecting the camcorder or
the optional SBAC-US10 SxS Memory Card
USB Reader/Writer to the computer, using an
USB cable as shown below.
If the computer is equipped with an ExpressCard/
34 or ExpressCard/54 slot, you can directly insert
the SxS memory card containing clips recorded
with this camcorder and access to the files.
For the operating requirements for the computer, see
“Using the CD-ROM” (page 14).
Note
The SxS Device Driver Software and SxS UDF driver
software on the CD-ROM supplied with the camcorder
must be installed on your computer. Before installation,
be sure to read the enclosed SxS Device Driver Software
End-User License Agreement.
For information on installation of the driver
software, refer to the ReadMe on the supplied CD-
ROM.
For support information for the driver software, visit
the following URL:
http://www.sony.net/SxS-Support/
With a Windows computer
Check that a Removable Disk appears in My
Computer. This indicates normal status.
With a Macintosh computer
An icon is displayed on the menu bar.
Preparations
When you connect the camcorder to a computer
using a USB cable (not supplied), the memory
card in the slot is acknowledged as an extended
drive by the computer.
When two memory cards are mounted in this
camcorder, they are acknowledged as two
independent extended drives by the computer.
Notes
• When connecting the USB cable to the computer, be
careful to check the form and direction of the USB
connector.
• The camcorder does not work on the bus power from
the computer.
To start USB connection
Note
When a computer is connected to the PC connector of the
camcorder and at the same time an optional PHU-120R
Professional Harddisk Unit (powered from a battery) is
connected to the computer, battery exhaustion on the
PHU-120R (indicated by a Battery End warning)
disables the following.
• To guard the PHU-120R against access from the
computer
• To disconnect the PHU-120R’s cable from the
memory card slot or plug again the cable into the slot
Operating Clips with a
Computer
Using the ExpressCard Slot of a
Computer
SxS PRO 8GB
To the ExpressCard slot
SxS memory card Computer with SxS
Device Driver
Software installed
USB Connection with a Computer
USB cable
(not supplied)
Operating Clips with a Computer
170
Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices
• To turn on the tally indicator on the viewfinder screen
to warn the operator
When you connect a computer to the PC
connector with a USB cable (not supplied), the
message “Connect USB Now?” is displayed to
prompt you to confirm that you wish to enable the
USB connection.
If you select “Cancel” or push the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE down to the ESCAPE
side or if you disconnect the USB cable, the
message “Connect USB Now?” disappears.
If you select “Execute” and press the MENU
knob, the USB connection is enabled and this
camcorder is recognized as an extension drive.
You can carry out the same operations by using
the arrow buttons (J, j, K, k) (see page 22).
If the USB connection is enabled during
recording/playback operation, the operation is
stopped and the message “USB Connecting”
appears on the viewfinder screen.
At this time, the output signal from the VIDEO
OUT connector, and HD/SD SDI OUT connector
changes to a black signal.
Notes
• The camcorder cannot be operated for recording,
playback, and so on while the message “USB
Connecting” is displayed.
• When the computer accesses the media loaded in the
camcorder, do not try to carry out the following
operations.
- Operating the camcorder (turning the power on/off,
switching the operation mode, etc.)
- Removing or loading a media from an active slot
(being accessed from the computer)
- Removing or connecting the USB cable
Disabling the USB connection
To disable the USB connection, follow the same
procedure as that for removing a device from the
computer.
To enable the USB connection again, first
disconnect the USB cable and then reconnect it.
The message “Connect USB Now?” appears
again.
Note
If you connect the camcorder to the computer using an
i.LINK cable, you cannot use the computer to operate
files stored in a recording media loaded in the memory
card slot of this camcorder.
To remove an SxS memory card
Windows
1. Click on the icon of “Safely Remove
Hardware” on the task bar of the computer.
2. Select “Safely remove SxS Memory Card -
Drive(X:)” from the displayed menu.
3. Check that the Safe To Remove Hardware
message appears then remove the card.
Macintosh
Drag the SxS memory card icon on the desktop to
Trash.
If the SxS memory card icon is located on Finder,
click on the eject icon on its side.
To use the application software
To copy clips to the local disk of a computer, the
supplied application software must be used.
Install the application software on the supplied
CD-ROM to your computer.
Although the data regarding recorded materials
are stored over multiple files and folders, you can
easily handle the clips without considering such
data and directory structure by using the supplied
application software.
Note
If you operate, e.g. copy the clips on the SxS memory
card by using the Explorer (Windows) or Finder
(Macintosh), the subsidiary data contained by the clips
may not be maintained. To avoid such a problem, use the
application software.
For installation and operations, refer to the User’s
Guide contained in the CD-ROM.
For support information on the application software,
visit on the cover page of the supplied CD-ROM.
To use a nonlinear editing system
For a nonlinear editing system, optional editing
software that corresponds to the recording
formats used with this camcorder is required.
Connecting an External Device (i.LINK Connection) 171
Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices
Store the clips to be edited on the HDD of your
computer in advance, using the supplied
application software.
Some editing software may not operate properly.
Be sure to confirm before use that it conforms to
the recording formats used with this camcorder.
You can record the same images as those
recorded on the memory card in this camcorder
on an external device connected to the i.LINK
(HDV/DV) connector, or record the playback
picture of the external device on the memory card
in the camcorder.
When you connect the camcorder to a non-linear
editing system that supports HDV format, you
can edit the images recorded on the memory card
in the camcorder.
Notes
• i.LINK connection is available only in FAT mode.
• Use the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector only for one-to-
one i.LINK connection.
• When you change a setting which affects output
signals from the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector, such as
HD/SD, HD System Line, System Frequency, and Rec
Format under OPERATION >Format in the setup
menu or i.LINK I/O and Down Converter under
OPERATION >Input/Output in the setup menu,
disconnect the i.LINK cable and change the setting.
Changing such a setting with the i.LINK cable
connected may cause improper operation of the
connected i.LINK device.
• The external signal input via the i.LINK connection
that can be recorded on the camcorder is HDV streams
only. You cannot record DV streams via the i.LINK
connection.
The picture being shot with this camcorder is
output as an HDV or DV stream via the i.LINK
(HDV/DV) connector. It can be recorded on a
connected HDV or DVCAM recorder in
synchronization with a recording start/stop
operation on this camcorder.
1Perform the preparatory settings of the
camcorder.
Connecting an External
Device (i.LINK
Connection)
FAT
Recording the Camera Picture on
an External Device
Connecting an External Device (i.LINK Connection)
172
Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices
• Set OPERATION >Input/Output >Output
& i.LINK in the setup menu (see
page 114) to “HD & HDV” or “SD &
HDV”.
HD & HDV or SD & HDV: To output an
HDV stream in HD mode when the
video format is set to an HDV
compatible format (SP 1440/59.94i,
SP 1440/50i, or SP 1440/23.94P)
SD & DV: To output a DV stream
• Set OPERATION >Input/Output >i.LINK
I/O in the setup menu to [Enable].
• Set MAINTENANCE >Trigger Mode
>i.LINK Trigger Mode in the setup menu
(see page 146) to [Both] or [External].
Both: To perform recording both on the
memory card in this camcorder and on
the external device
External: To perform recording only on
the external device
2Set the external device to recording
standby status.
For operations of the external device, refer to
the operation manual of that device.
3Start recording.
The external device starts recording in
synchronization.
The status of the external device is displayed in
the i.LINK status indication area (see page 33) on
the viewfinder screen.
Notes
• Operation may be different depending on the type of
external device.
• When you execute the operation to make a recording
on the recording media loaded in the camcorder while
HDV signals are output from the i.LINK (HDV/DV)
connector, HDV signal output stops for about one
second before the recording starts, and then it resumes.
• While you can record shot marks on the memory card
during recording, they are not added to the pictures
recorded on the external device.
You can transfer an HDV stream to a nonlinear
editing system connected via the i.LINK (HDV/
DV) connector.
Notes
• The i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector of this camcorder is
a 6-pin connector. Check the number of pins of the
i.LINK connector on your computer and use an
appropriate i.LINK cable.
• In searching pictures of this camcorder on the
computer, it may take some time until the display is
reflected on the computer.
• If the playback clip is short or the playback starting
point is near the end of the clip, the i.LINK signal may
be interrupted between the clip and the next clip. When
you try to capture such a signal using the nonlinear
editing system, a malfunction may occur, depending
on the nonlinear editing software in use.
• If you specify a search speed other than 4, 15, or 24
times normal with the nonlinear editing system, no
i.LINK signal is fed out. In such a case, the picture on
the LCD monitor may stay frozen.
• High-speed playback picture may not be displayed on
the computer screen, depending on the nonlinear
editing software in use.
Setting on this camcorder
Set OPERATION >Input/Output >i.LINK I/O in
the setup menu to [Enable].
For operations of the nonlinear editing software,
refer to the operation manual of the software.
The HDV stream input from a device connected
via the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector can be
recorded on an SxS memory card in this
camcorder.
The timecodes superimposed on the i.LINK input
are recorded regardless of the settings of the
camcorder.
Note
DV stream cannot be recorded.
1Set the external signal to a format that
can be recorded on the camcorder.
Select an HDV compatible format (SP 1440/
59.94i, SP 1440/50i, or SP 1440/23.94P) for
the video format.
Indication Status of the external device
STBY In HDV recording standby
zREC In HDV recording
STBY In DV recording standby
zREC In DV recording
HDV
HDV
DV
DV
Nonlinear Editing
Recording External Input Signals
Configuring a Shooting and Recording System 173
Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices
2Make the following settings with
OPERATION >Input/Output in the
setup menu (see page 114).
• Set Output&i.LINK to [HD&HDV] or
[SD&HDV].
• Set i.LINK I/O to [Enable].
• Set Source Select to [i.LINK].
The input video is displayed on the
viewfinder screen or the monitor connected
to the VIDEO OUT connector.
Audio signals are output through the built-in
speakers, the headphones connected to the
EARPHONE connector, and the speakers of
the monitor connected to the VIDEO OUT
connector.
3Start the recording.
Notes
• An error is generated in the following cases. In such a
case, cancel Recording mode.
- The video format of input signal does not match that
specified on the camcorder.
- A copy-protected stream is being fed in.
• If the input to the camcorder becomes no signal during
recording, the TALLY indicators, the tally indicator on
the front of the viewfinder, and the REC indication
(zREC) on the viewfinder screen flash, indicating that
no signal is being recorded on the SxS memory card.
When an input signal is resumed, recording is
restarted, incrementing the clip number on the memory
card.
If you install the optional CBK-HD02 on this
camcorder, you can attach the XDCA-55 HD
Camera Adaptor and connect the XDCU-50 HD
Camera Extension Unit.
This allows you to configure a shooting and
recording system consisting of multiple
camcorders with camera extension units
connected to a remote control unit.
For more information about the XDCA-55 and
XDCU-50, refer to their respective operation
manuals.
Note
When using the camcorder in this system, do not connect
a video light to the camcorder.
Configuring a Shooting
and Recording System
Testing the Camcorder / Maintenance
174
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Check the functions of the camcorder before
setting out for a shooting session, preferably by
recording and playing back video and audio
signals. Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and
mirror inside the viewfinder barrel.
Clean the lens and protecting filter with a
commercially available lens cleaner.
Caution
Never use organic solvents such as thinners.
Disassembling the eyepiece for cleaning
(example: HDVF-20A)
1Detach the eyepiece from the viewfinder
barrel.
For the detaching procedure, see “Detaching
the Eyepiece” on page 39.
2Remove the eyecup from the eyecup
holder.
Chapter9Maintenance
Testing the Camcorder Maintenance
Cleaning the Viewfinder
1Viewfinder barrel
2Eyecup holder
3Protecting filter
4Packing ring
5Eyecup
Maintenance 175
Chapter 9 Maintenance
3Remove the protecting filter, together
with the packing ring, from inside the
eyecup holder.
4Detach the protecting filter from the
packing ring.
Fog-proof filter
Depending on the temperature and humidity, the
protecting filter may mist because of vapor or
your breath. To ensure that the viewfinder is
always clear, replace the protecting filter with a
fog-proof filter (service part number: 1-547-341-
11).
Fitting the fog-proof filter
Replace the protecting filter on the packing ring
with the fog-proof filter.
Be sure to correctly assemble the fog-proof filter,
the packing ring, and the eyecup so that the
reassembled eyepiece is waterproof.
Note
When cleaning the fog-proof filter, wipe it very gently
with a soft cloth to avoid damaging the anti-fogging
coating.
The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for
battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable
part.
Power may not be supplied to the unit properly if
the pins of the battery terminal are bent or
deformed by shock or vibrations, or if they
become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use.
Periodic inspections are recommended to keep
the unit working properly and to prolong its
usable lifetime.
Contact a Sony service or sales representative for
more information about inspections.
Note about the Battery Terminal
Operation Warnings
176
Chapter 9 Maintenance
If a problem occurs when the camcorder is powered or is being operated, a warning is issued by various
visible and audible indicators. These visible and audible indicators are:
• Error/warning message (“A” in the “Layout of the table of warning messages” below)
• WARNING indicator (“B”), warning sound from the speaker and earphones (“C”), tally/REC indication
(“D”), and battery remaining indicator (“E”).
A warning message, and the REC indication appear on the viewfinder screen.
The volume of the warning sound can be adjusted with the ALARM knob. Set the ALARM knob to the
minimum position to suppress the sound.
Layout of the table of warning messages
• The operation of the WARNING indicator, the tally/REC indication, and the battery indicator is
represented by graphic symbols as follows.
: Continuous
: 1 flash/s
: 4 flashes/s
• The warning sounds are represented by graphic symbols as follows.
: Continuous beep
: 1 beep/s
Operation Warnings
A
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
BC D E
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
Error Indication
E*****
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
——
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
Error (The camcorder
is abnormal.)
Recording stops. Turn off the power and confirm whether an error
occurs on the connected devices, the cables, and
the media or not. (If power cannot be turned off
by setting the POWER switch to OFF, remove the
battery pack or the AC power source.)
If the problem continues after the camcorder is
restarted, contact your Sony service
representative.
Operation Warnings 177
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Warning Indication
Media Near Full
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
Free space on the SxS
memory card has
become insufficient.
Recording continues. Replace it with another at the earliest opportunity.
Media Full
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
No space is left on the
SxS memory card.
Recording, clip
copying and clip
division cannot be
performed.
Recording stops. Replace it with another.
Battery Near End
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The battery power will
be exhausted soon.
Recording continues. Charge the battery pack at the earliest
opportunity.
Battery End
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The battery pack is
exhausted. Recording
cannot be performed.
Recording stops. Connect a power source via the DC IN connector
or stop operation to charge the battery pack.
Temperature High
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The internal
temperature has risen
above a safe operation
limit.
Recording continues. Suspend operation, turn off the power, and wait
until the temperature falls.
Operation Warnings
178
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Voltage Low
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The DC IN voltage has
become low (stage 1).
Recording continues. Check the power supply.
Insufficient Voltage
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The DC IN voltage is
too low (stage 2).
Recording cannot be
performed.
Recording stops. Connect other power source.
Battery Error
Please Change Battery.
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
An error was detected
with the battery pack.
Recording stops. Replace the battery pack with a normal one.
Backup Battery End
Please Change.
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The remaining power
of the backup battery
is insufficient.
Recording continues. Refer to a Sony service representative to replace
the battery with a new one.
Unknown Media(A)1)
Please Change.
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
A partitioned memory
card or one that
contains recorded clips
exceeding the number
permitted with this
camcorder is loaded.
Recording continues. This card cannot be used with this camcorder.
Remove it and load a compatible card.
Operation Warnings 179
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Reached Clip Number Limit
Cannot Record to Media(A)1)
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The maximum number
of clips for a single
memory card is
reached. No more clip
can be recorded on the
card.
Recording stops. Replace it with another card.
Media Error
Media(A)1) Needs to be Restored
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
An error occurred with
the memory card. The
card requires
restoration.
Recording stops. Remove the card, load it again, and restore it.
Media Error
Cannot Record to Media(A)1)
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
Recording cannot be
done, as the memory
card is defective.
Recording stops. As playback may be possible, it is recommended
to replace it with another card after copying the
clips, as required.
Media Error
Cannot Use Media(A)1)
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
Neither recording nor
playback can be done,
as the memory card is
defective.
Recording stops. It cannot be operated with this camcorder.
Replace it with another card.
Cannot Use Media(A)1)
Unsupported File System
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
A card of a different
file system was
inserted.
Recording stops. It cannot be used with this camcorder. Replace it
with another card.
Operation Warnings
180
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Video Format Mismatch
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The external signal
input via the i.LINK
connection cannot be
recorded, as the Video
Format setting is
different from the
signal format of the
external input signal.
Recording stops. Change settings of OPERATION >Format in the
setup menu to match it to that of the external
signal.
Copy Protected Input
Cannot Record
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The external signal
input via the i.LINK
connection cannot be
recorded, as the stream
is copy-protected.
Recording stops. Check the input signal.
DVCAM Input Signal!
Cannot Record
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The external signal
input via the i.LINK
connection cannot be
recorded, as it is a DV
stream.
Recording stops. —
Media Error
Playback Halted
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
An error occurred in
reading data from the
memory card, and
playback cannot be
continued.
Recording stops. If this frequently occurs, change the memory card
after copying the clips, as required.
Media(A)1) Error
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
Recording cannot be
done, as an error
occurred with the
memory card.
Recording stops. If this frequently occurs, change the memory
card.
Operation Warnings 181
Chapter 9 Maintenance
HDD A2) Battery Near End
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The battery power of
the connected HDD
will be exhausted
soon.
Recording continues.Change the battery at the earliest opportunity.
HDD A2) Battery End
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The battery of the
connected HDD is
exhausted. Recording
cannot be performed.
Recording stops. Stop operation to change the battery.
Not Enough Capacity
Change Media(A)1)
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
There is not enough
capacity for copying.
Recording continues
(disallowing copy).
Replace the card in slot A with another one.
Reached Duplication Limit
Change Media(A)1)
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The card has already
ten clips having the
same name as that you
tried to duplicate.
Recording continues
(disallowing copy).
Replace the card in slot A with another one.
Not Enough Capacity
Cannot Divide
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
There is not enough
capacity for dividing a
clip.
Recording continues
(disallowing divide).
—
Will Switch Slots Soon
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
Will switch to other
slot soon.
Recording continues. Make sure that a memory card is loaded in the
other slot.
Operation Warnings
182
Chapter 9 Maintenance
No Clip
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
There is no clip to be
displayed.
Recording continues. —
No OK Clip
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
There is no clip with
the OK mark.
Recording continues. —
Same File Already Exists
Change Media(A)1)
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The card has already
clips having the same
name as that you tried
to duplicate.
Recording continues
(disallowing copy).
Replace the card in slot A with another one.
Media Reached Rewriting Limit
Change Media(A)1)
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The memory card
comes to the end of its
service life.
Recording stops. Make a backup copy and replace the card with
another one as soon as possible. Recording/
playback may not be performed properly if you
continue to use the card.
For details, refer to the Operating Instructions of
the memory card.
Unsupported Clip Included
Cannot Use Media(A)1)
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The inserted memory
card contains clips
recorded in a format
that is not supported
by this camcorder.
— The card in slot A cannot be used with this
camcorder.
Operation Warnings 183
Chapter 9 Maintenance
1) (B) for the card in slot B
2) B for a HDD connected to slot B
Fan Stopped 1)
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The fan does not rotate
when started.
— Avoid use under high temperature conditions.
Power the camcorder off and contact a Sony
service representative.
Media was Ejected Just Now
It Needs to be Restored
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
— ———
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
Restoration is required
because the media was
removed while the
camcorder was in
recording standby
mode of Clip
Continuous Rec (see
page 84).
Recording continues. Insert again the media which was removed and
restore it (see page 72).
USB(Host)Over Current
Remove USB Device
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
— ———
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
Power to the external
device connector was
removed because
overcurrent was
detected on the
connector. (Other
operations are not
affected.)
Recording continues. Power the camcorder off and remove the Wi-Fi
adapter or USB flash drive that is connected to
the external device connector.
Important Notes on Operation
184
Appendix
Use and storage
Do not subject the camcorder to severe shocks
• The internal mechanism may be damaged or the
body warped.
• If an accessory mounted on the accessory shoe
is subjected to severe shock, the accessory shoe
may be damaged. In such a case, stop using it
and contact your dealer or a Sony service
representative.
Do not cover the camcorder while operating
Putting a cloth, for example, over the camcorder
can cause excessive internal heat build-up.
After use
Always turn off the POWER switch.
Before storing the camcorder for a long period
Remove the battery pack.
Shipping
• Remove the media before transporting the
camcorder.
• If sending the camcorder by truck, ship, air or
other transportation service, pack it in the
shipping carton of the camcorder.
Care of the camcorder
Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the
lenses or optical filters using a blower.
If the body of the camcorder is dirty, clean it with
a soft, dry cloth. In extreme cases, use a cloth
steeped in a little neutral detergent, then wipe dry.
Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or
thinners, as these may cause discoloration or
other damage to the finish of the camcorder.
In the event of operating problems
If you should experience problems with the
camcorder, contact a Sony service representative.
Use and storage locations
Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or
storing the camcorder in the following places.
• In excessive heat or cold (operating temperature
range: –5°C to +40°C (23°F to 104°F))
• Remember that in summer in warm climates the
temperature inside a car with the windows
closed can easily exceed 50°C (122°F).
• In damp or dusty locations
• Locations where the camcorder may be exposed
to rain
• Locations subject to violent vibration
• Near strong magnetic fields
• Close to radio or TV transmitters producing
strong electromagnetic fields.
• In direct sunlight or close to heaters for
extended periods
To prevent electromagnetic interference from
portable communications devices
The use of portable telephones and other
communications devices near this camcorder can
result in malfunctions and interference with audio
and video signals.
It is recommended that the portable
communications devices near this camcorder be
powered off.
Fitting the zoom lens
It is important to fit the lens correctly, as
otherwise damage may result. Be sure to refer to
the section “Mounting and Adjusting the Lens”
(page 42).
Viewfinder
Do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece
pointing directly at the sun.
The eyepiece lens can concentrate the sun’s rays
and melt the interior of the viewfinder.
About the LCD panels
The LCD panel fitted to this camcorder is
manufactured with high precision technology,
giving a functioning pixel ratio of at least 99.99%.
Thus a very small proportion of pixels maybe
Appendix
Important Notes on
Operation
Important Notes on Operation 185
Appendix
“stuck”, either always off (black), always on (red,
green, or blue), or flashing. In addition, over a
long period of use, because of the physical
characteristics of the liquid crystal display, such
“stuck” pixels may appear spontaneously. These
problems are not a malfunction. Note that any
such problems have no effect on recorded data.
Phenomena specific to CCD image
sensors
The following phenomena that may appear in
images are specific to CCD (Charge Coupled
Device) image sensors. They do not indicate
malfunctions.
White flecks
Although the CCD image sensors are produced
with high-precision technologies, fine white
flecks may be generated on the screen in rare
cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc.
This is related to the principle of CCD image
sensors and is not a malfunction.
The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the
following cases:
• When operating at a high environmental
temperature
• When you have raised the master gain
(sensitivity)
In SLS mode, white flecks are more prominent
when you set the shutter speed (number of
frames) to higher values.
The problem may be alleviated by executing the
APR (automatic pixel noise reduction) function
with MAINTENANCE >APR in the setup menu
(see page 146). Pixel noise is reduced to some
extent by automatic black balance adjustment
(see page 54), but the detection capabilities of
that function are limited. For the most effective
correction, execute the APR function.
Vertical smear
When an extremely bright object, such as a strong
spotlight or flashlight, is being shot, vertical tails
may be produced on the screen, or the image may
be distorted.
Aliasing
When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they
may appear jagged or flicker.
Fragmentation
If pictures cannot be recorded/reproduced
properly, try formatting the recording medium.
While repeating picture recording/playback with
a certain recording medium for an extended
period, files in the medium may be fragmented,
disabling proper recording/storage. In such a
case, make a backup of clips in the medium then
perform formatting of the medium using
OPERATION >Format Media (see page 113) in
the setup menu.
1Monitor screen
2Vertical tails shown on the image
3Bright object (e.g. strong spotlight,
strong reflected light, flashlight, the sun)
Exchanging the Battery of the Internal Clock / Specifications
186
Appendix
The camcorder’s internal clock is powered by a
lithium battery. If the message “BackUp Battery
End” appears in the viewfinder, this battery must
be exchanged. Contact a Sony service
representative.
Exchanging the Battery
of the Internal Clock
Specifications
General
Power requirements
12 V DC (11 V to 17.0 V)
Power consumption
Approx. 27 W (main unit only, during recording
with the LCD monitor lit)
Notes
• Do not use a video light with power
consumption of over 50 W.
• When connecting a device to the DC OUT
connector, use one with current
consumption of 0.5 A or more.
Operating temperature
–5ºC to +40ºC (23ºF to 104ºF)
Storage temperature
–20ºC to +60ºC (–4ºF to 140ºF)
Recording/playback formats
UDF mode
• HD422
Video codec: MPEG-2 422P@HL
Video rate: 50 Mbps/CBR
Video samples: 1920 × 1080, 1280 × 720
Proxy video: MPEG-4
Audio: LPCM 4CH, 24 bits, 48 kHz
Proxy audio: A-law
• HD420
Video codec: MPEG-2 MP@HL(1440)
Video rate: 35 Mbps/VBR
Video samples: 1440 × 1080
Proxy video: MPEG-4
Audio: LPCM 4CH, 16 bits, 48 kHz
Proxy audio: A-law
Video codec: MPEG-2 MP@HL
Video rate: 35 Mbps/VBR
Video samples: 1280 × 720
Proxy video: MPEG-4
Audio: LPCM 4CH, 16 bits, 48 kHz
Proxy audio: A-law
Specifications 187
Appendix
•IMX
Video codec: MPEG-2 422P@ML Intra
Video rate: 50 Mbps
Video samples: 720 × 486 (NTSC)/576 (PAL)
Proxy video: MPEG-4
Audio: LPCM 4CH, 24/16 bits, 48 kHz
Proxy audio: A-law
• DVCAM
Video rate: 25 Mbps
Video samples: 720 × 480 (NTSC)/576 (PAL)
Proxy video: MPEG-4
Audio: LPCM 4CH, 16 bits, 48 kHz
Proxy audio: A-law
FAT mode
• HD420
Video codec: MPEG-2 MP@HL
Video rate: 35 Mbps/VBR
Video samples: 1920 × 1080, 1280 × 720
Audio: LPCM 4CH, 16 bits, 48 kHz
Video codec: MPEG-2 MP@HL(1440)
Video rate: 35 Mbps/VBR
Video samples: 1440 × 1080
Audio: LPCM 4CH, 16 bits, 48 kHz
Video codec: MPEG-2 MP@H14
Video rate: 25 Mbps/CBR
Video samples: 1440 × 1080
Audio: LPCM 4CH, 16 bits, 48 kHz
• DVCAM
Video rate: 25 Mbps
Video samples: 720 × 480 (NTSC)/576 (PAL)
Audio: LPCM 2CH, 16 bits, 48 kHz
Recording/playback time
With one SBP-16
FAT mode HQ: About 50 minutes
SP: About 70 minutes
DVCAM: About 65 minutes
UDF mode HD422 50/IMX50: About
30 minutes
HD420 HQ: About 45 minutes
DVCAM: About 55 minutes
With one SBP-32/SBS-32G1A
FAT mode HQ: About 100 minutes
SP: About 140 minutes
DVCAM: About 130 minutes
UDF mode HD422 50/IMX50: About
60 minutes
HD420 HQ: About 90 minutes
DVCAM: About 110 minutes
With one SBS-64G1A
FAT mode HQ: About 200 minutes
SP: About 280 minutes
DVCAM: About 260 minutes
UDF mode HD422 50/IMX50: About
120 minutes
HD420 HQ: About
180 minutes
DVCAM: About 220 minutes
Note
The actual recording/playback time may differ
slightly from the values shown here, depending
on usage conditions, memory characteristics,
etc.
Continuous operation time
With the BP-GL95
Approx. 180 min.
Mass
Main body only: 3.4 kg (7 lb 7.9 oz)
Dimensions
See page 190.
Supplied accessories
See page 189.
Camera Block
Pickup device
2/3-type, CCD image sensor
Effective picture elements:
1920 (H) × 1080 (V)
Format
3-chip RGB
Specifications
188
Appendix
LCD monitor
Input/Output connectors
Optical system
F1.4 prism system
ND filters
1: Clear
2: 1/4ND
3: 1/16ND
4: 1/64ND
Sensitivity
F11 (System frequency: 59.94i)
F12 (System frequency: 50i)
(2000lx, 89.9% reflection, 3200K)
Minimum illumination
0.016 lx (F1.4, +42 dB, 16-frame accumulation)
Video S/N
54 dB (Noise Suppress Off)
59 dB (Noise Suppress On)
Horizontal resolution
1000TV lines or more
Modulation
45% or more (27.5 MHz, at screen center)
Black level
3±1% (when Black in the setup menu is set to
[±0])
Gain
–6, –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 42 dB, AGC
Shutter speed
59.94i/P, 50i/P: 1/60 to 1/2000 sec.
29.97P: 1/40 to 1/2000 sec.
25P: 1/33 to 1/2000 sec.
23.94P: 1/32 to 1/2000 sec.
Slow shutter
2 to 8, 16 frames
Dynamic range
600%
460% (1080/29.97P, 1080/25P, 1080/23.98P)
Smear
–135 dB
Audio Block
Sampling frequency
48 kHz
Quantization
16 bits/24 bits
Headroom
20 dB (the factory default setting)
(20, 18, 16, 12 dB), EBU
Frequency response
20 Hz to 20 kHz (within ±3 dB)
Dynamic range
90 dB (typical)
Distortion
0.08% max. (with input level 40 dBu)
Built-in speaker
Monaural
Output: 300 mW
Display
Screen size
8.8 cm diagonal (3.5-inch)
Aspect ratio
16:9
Picture elements
640 (H) × 3 × 480 (V) Sequence delta
Transmission system
Hybrid (semi-transmissive) type
Media Block
Card slots
Type: Express Card34
Number of slots: 2
Connector: Conforms to PCMCIA Express Card
Standard
Writing rate
50 Mbps or more
Reading rate
50 Mbps or more
Inputs/Outputs
Signal inputs
GENLOCK IN: BNC type
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced
TC IN: BNC type
0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10 kΩ
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2: XLR type, 3-pin,
female
(With automatic detection and switching
function)
MIC: –70 to –20 dBu
Specifications 189
Appendix
Option key
Power supply and related equipment
Lens, Viewfinder and Related Equipment
Equipment for remote control
LINE: +4, 0, –3 dBu
MIC IN: XLR type, 5-pin, female
–70 to –20 dBu
WRR CH1/CH2
D-sub 15-pin
WRR analog: –40 dBu
WRR digital: –40 dbFS
HD/SD SDI
When an option is installed
4-channel audio
Signal outputs
VIDEO OUT: BNC type, switching between SD
analog composite and HD-Y
HD/SD SDI OUT 1/2: BNC type
0.8 Vp-p, unbalanced (switching between
HD and SD)
Complied to SMPTE292M/259M
4-channel audio (CH1 to CH4)
AUDIO OUT: XLR type, 5-pin, male
+4, 0, –3 dBu (balanced)
TC OUT: BNC type
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω
EARPHONE (stereo minijack)
8Ω, 5 mW
Others
DC IN: XLR type, 4-pin, male
11 to 17 V DC
DC OUT: 4-pin
11 to 17 V DC, maximum rated current:
0.5 A
LENS: 12-pin
Supplying power to the lens
11 to 17 V DC, maximum rated current:
1.0 A
REMOTE: 8-pin
LIGHT: 2-pin
USB: 4-pin (type A), 4-pin (type B)
i.LINK (HDV/DV): 6-pin, complies with
IEEE1394
VF: 26-pin, rectangular, 20-pin round
For wireless receiver: D-sub 15-pin
Supplied Accessories
Shoulder strap (1)
Cold shoe kit (1 set)
Lens mount cap (1)
Flange back adjustment chart
OPERATION MANUAL
Japanese version (1)
English version (1)
CD-ROM
- Utility Software for XDCAM (application
software, device driver software) (1)
- Manuals for Solid-State Memory Camcorder
(PDF OPERATION MANUAL and
SUPPLEMENT) (1)
Recommended Additional
Equipment
SD Record and Playback Key
CBK-MD01
Hardware Upgrade Key
CBK-UPG01
AC Adaptor
AC-DN10/DN2B
Battery Pack
BP-L80S/L60S
Battery Charger
BC-M150/L500/L70
Lens
2/3-type bayonet mount lenses only
Viewfinder
HDVF series viewfinder: HDVF-200/20A/
C35W/C950W/C730W
CBK-VF01
Viewfinder Rotation Bracket
BKW-401
Remote Control Unit
RM-B150/B750
RCP-1000/1500/1530
SDI/COMPOSITE Input and 50 Pin Interface
CBK-HD02
HD Camera Adaptor
XDCA-55 (when an optional CBK-HD02 is
installed)
HD Camera Extension Unit
XDCU-50
Specifications
190
Appendix
Media
Audio equipment
Other peripheral devices
Equipment for maintenance and easier handling
Dimensions
Design and specifications are subject to change
without notice.
MPEG TS Adaptor
HDCA-702 (when an optional CBK-HD02 is
installed)
Wi-Fi Adapter
CBK-WA01 (when an optional CBK-UPG01
is installed)
SxS Memory Card
SxS PRO SBP-16 (16 GB)
SxS PRO SBP-32 (32 GB)
SxS-1 SBS-32G1A (32 GB)
SxS-1 SBS-64G1A (64 GB)
Professional Harddisk Unit
PHU-120R (in FAT mode)
Media Adaptor
MEAD-MS01 (for “Memory Stick PRO-HG
Duo HX” series)
MEAD-SD01 (for SDHC card)
Mobile Storage Unit
PXU-MS240
Microphone
ECM-678/674/673/680S
Microphone Holder
CAC-12
Wireless Microphone
DWR-S01D
WRR-855S/860C/861/862
Tripod adaptor
VCT-14/U14
Video Light
UC-D200A (PROTECH)
Ultralight (Anton Bauer)
Pad
CBK-SP01 Soft Type Shoulder Pad
Hard Carrying Case
LC-H300
Soft Carrying Case
LC-DS300SFT
Maintenance Manual
Notes
• Always make a test recording, and verify that it was
recorded successfully.
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES
OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR
REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF
FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS RECORDING
MEDIA, EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS OR
ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS
TO RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.
• Always verify that the unit is operating properly
before use. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR
REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE
LOSS OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE
PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT,
EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD
OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE
WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON
WHATSOEVER.
(in mm (inches))
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories 191
Appendix
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories
a) The carrying case is large enough to hold the camcorder with lens and microphone mounted. However,
remove them if they protrude more than 25 cm (9 7/8 inches) from the front of the main unit.
ECM-680S/678/
674/673
Microphone
CAC-12
Microphone Holder
HD monitor/SD monitor
XDCAM HD series recorder
PDW-F1600/HD1500, PDW-F75
HDCAM series recorder
HDW-2000 series recorder, HDW-S280
WRR-855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
DWR-S01D Digital Wireless Receiver
PMW-500
RM-B150/B750
RCP-730/750/751/
920/921
MSU-900/950/700
Remote Control Unit
VCT-14/U14
Tripod Adaptor
Tripod
LC-DS300SFT a)
Soft Carrying
Case
AC-DN10/DN2B
AC Adaptor
BC-L500 Battery
Charger
BC-M150 Battery
Charger
BC-L70 Battery
Charger
BP-GL95/GL65/L80S/
L60S
Battery Pack
SBP-16/32
SBS-32G1A/64G1A
SxS Memory Card
PHU-120R
Professional Harddisk Unit
LC-H300
Hard Carrying Case
HDVF-200/20A/
C35W/C950W/
C730W Viewfinder
CBK-MD01 SD Record and Playback Key
MEAD-MS01, MEAD-SD01 Media Adaptor
PXU-MS240 Mobile Storage Unit
CBK-HD02 SDI/COMPOSITE Input and
50 Pin Interface + XDCA-55 HD Camera
Adaptor
XDCU-50 HD Camera Extension Unit
CBK-VF01
Viewfinder
CBK-UPG01 Hardware Upgrade Key + CBK-WA01
Wi-Fi Adapter
CBK-HD02 SDI/COMPOSITE Input and 50 Pin Interface
CBK-HD02 SDI/COMPOSITE Input and
50 Pin Interface + HDCA-702 MPEG TS
Adapter
About i.LINK
192
Appendix
This section explains the specifications and
features of i.LINK.
What is i.LINK?
i.LINK is a digital serial interface designed to
integrate devices equipped with i.LINK
connectors. i.LINK allows your device to:
• Perform two-way transmission and reception of
data such as digital audio and digital video
signals.
• Control other i.LINK devices.
• Easily connect multiple devices with a single
i.LINK cable.
Your i.LINK device is capable of connecting to a
wide range of digital AV devices for data transfer
and other operations.
Other advantages include the following feature.
When connected to multiple i.LINK devices,
your i.LINK device can perform data transfer and
other operations not only
with the directly connected devices but also with
any of the devices that are connected to those
devices. Therefore, you do not need to be
concerned with device connection order.
However, depending on the features and
specifications of the connected devices, you may
need to use certain functions differently, and you
may not be able to transfer data or perform certain
operations.
i.LINK, a nickname for IEEE 1394 proposed by
Sony, is a trademark supported by many
companies worldwide.
IEEE 1394 is an international standard defined by
IEEE, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers, Inc.
Note
The camcorder can be connected to one device with the
i.LINK cable (DV cable). When you connect with an
HDV or DV device that has two or more i.LINK
connectors, refer to the
Operating Instructions supplied with the connected
device.
About data transfer speed of i.LINK
i.LINK defines a maximum data transfer speed of
approximately 100, 200 and 400 Mbps 1) that are
described as S100, S200 and S400 respectively.
For i.LINK devices, a maximum data transfer
speed that the device supports is identified on
“Specifications” page of the Operating
Instructions supplied with the device or near its
i.LINK connector.
1) When connecting with the device that support
different data transfer speed, the actual data transfer
speed may be different from those described on the
i.LINK connectors.
What is Mbps?
Mega bits per second. A measure of the rate at
which data is transmitted per second. In case of
100 Mbps, 100 Mega bits of data can be
transmitted per second.
i.LINK operation with your camcorder
For details on operation when other equipment
with i.LINK (HDV or DV) connector is
connected, see page 171.
For details on connection with i.LINK cable and
necessary software, refer to the Operating
Instructions supplied with the connected device.
About the required i.LINK cable
Use the Sony 6-pin-to-4-pin or 6-pin-to-6-pin
i.LINK cable to connect the i.LINK devices.
i.LINK and are trademarks.
About i.LINK
MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License / MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio License / About Bitmap Fonts
193
Appendix
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO
LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-
COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR
(i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE
WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD
(“MPEG-4 VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN
A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL
ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM
A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG
LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE
IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING
THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL,
INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND
LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM
MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTP://
WWW.MPEGLA.COM
MPEG LA is offering licenses for (i)
manufacturing/sales of any storage media storing
MPEG-4 Visual video information (ii)
distribution/broadcasting of MPEG-4 Visual
video information in any manner (such as online
video distribution service, internet broadcasting,
TV broadcasting). Other usage of this product
may be required to obtain license from MPEGLA.
Please contact MPEG LA for any further
information. MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 STEELE
STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO
80206, http://www.mpegla.com
ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN
CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY
MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE
MPEG-2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING
VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED
MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED
WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER
APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250
STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER,
COLORADO 80206.
“PACKAGED MEDIA” means any storage
media storing MPEG-2 video information such as
DVD movie which are sold/distributed to general
consumers. Disc replicators or sellers of the
PACKAGED MEDIA need to obtain licenses for
their own business from MPEG LA. Please
contact MPEG LA for any further information.
MPEG LA. L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET,
SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206
http://www.mpegla.com
This product uses RICOH Bitmap Fonts
produced and sold by Ricoh Company, Ltd.
MPEG-4 Visual Patent
Portfolio License
MPEG-2 Video Patent
Portfolio License
About Bitmap Fonts
About OpenSSL
194
Appendix
Because it uses the OpenSSL Toolkit, this product uses software developed by the OpenSSL Project
(http://www.openssl.org/).
OpenSSL License
---------------
/* ====================================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
* software must display the following acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
* endorse or promote products derived from this software without
* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
* openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
* permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
* acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
About OpenSSL
About OpenSSL 195
Appendix
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
-----------------------
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
About OpenSSL
196
Appendix
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
*
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
*
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
*
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
Index 197
Index
Symbols
! (warning) indicator 30
A
AC power 36
ACCESS lamps 21, 24
Accessories (optional) 191
Accessory fitting shoe 16
Adaptor connector 15
ALARM knob 18
Area setting 40
Arrow buttons (K, k, J, j) 22
ASSIGN. 0 switch 19
ASSIGN. 1/2/3 switches 18
ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches 24
Assignable switches, assigning functions 155
ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) 19
Audio control section 22
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors 26
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4
switches 23
AUDIO IN selectors 26
Audio input system 43
Audio level
adjusting 60
adjusting playback level 18
meters 34
AUDIO OUT connector 26
AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switches 23
AUTO W/B BAL switch 17
B
BACKLIGHT button 22
BATT indicator 30
Battery
attachment shoe 15
of the internal clock, exchanging 186
pack 35
remaining 32
BKW-401 38
Black balance, adjusting 54
BRIGHT control 28, 29
Brightness level 33
C
Camera adaptor 15
Camera operator tally indicator 28
Clip Continuous Rec 83
Clip(s)
batch copy 103
copying 102
cue up 94
defining names 88
deleting 77, 103
displaying properties 100
dividing 106
operating with a computer 169
operations 91
playing 76, 94
protecting 102
proxy data 85
selecting 94
Clock setting 41
COLOR TEMP. button 18
Color temperature 32
Connection 167
monitors 167
using i.LINK 171
CONTRAST control 28, 29
Cover 20
D
Date, setting 41
DC IN connector 15
DC OUT 12V connector 15
DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control) 19
Depth of field indication 32
Digital extender 31
Diopter adjustment ring 28, 29
DISP SEL/EXPAND button 21
DISPLAY switches 22, 29
DISPLAY/ASPECT switch 28
E
EARPHONE jack 26
EJECT buttons 24
Electric color temperature filter 33
Index
Index
198
Index
ESSENCE MARK button 23
Essence mark thumbnail screen 105
Expand thumbnail screen
displaying 104
to increase the number of divisions 105
Extender 31
External device connector 24
External devices 167
control 33
External input 33
External power source 32
Eyecup 28, 29
F
F FWD button/indicator 21
F REV button/indicator 21
Filter position 33
FILTER selector 17
Fitting for optional microphone holder 16
Flange focal length, adjusting 42
Focus
adjustment mode 33
position 31
Formatting 70, 73
Frame Rec 81
Framing 76, 84
Framing shots 84
Freeze Mix 84
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch 23
G
GAIN selector 19
Gain value 34
GENLOCK IN connector 25
Green tally 31
Green tally indicator 30
H
HD/SD SDI OUT connector 26
Histogram 34
HOLD button 22
I
i.LINK 192
cable 192
connection 171
i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector 26
Index picture 93
changing 106
Indicators and status display 28
Initial value 110
Input source 33
Internal clock 41
Interval Rec 79
Iris
position 34
L
LCD monitor 20, 26
LCD panel 20
Lens
cable clamp 16
locking lever 17
mount 17
mount cap 17
mount securing rubber 16
mounting 42
LENS connector 16
Lens file(s)
loading 164
loading automatically 165
saving 164
setting data 164
LEVEL CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 knobs 23
LIGHT connector 16
LIGHT switch 15
Line input audio equipment, connecting 47
Live & Play 76
M
Maintenance 174
Media
remaining capacity 27, 34
status 31
MENU button 22
MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch 19
MENU knob 17
MENU ON/OFF switch 19
MIC IN (+48 V) connector 16
MIC LEVEL control 18
Microphone holder 29, 30
fitting 16
Microphone, connecting 43
MIRROR switch 29
Index 199
Index
MONITOR knob 18
MONITOR switches 18
Monitor, connecting 167
MPEG TS adapter 15
N
ND filter 17
NEXT button 21
Nonlinear editing 170, 172
Number of system lines 32
O
OK/NG/KP mark(s) 92, 101
adding 101
deleting 101
setting 78
Operation status 31
of i.LINK device 33
Optional components 191
OUTPUT/DCC switch 19
P
PC connector 24
PEAKING control 28, 29
Picture Cache 78
Planning metadata 87
PLAY/PAUSE button/indicator 21
Plug 28, 29
Power source voltage/battery remaining
capacity 32
Power supply 35
POWER switch 15
Preset values, resetting 162
PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch 23
PREV button 21
Proxy data 85
R
REC START button 17
Recording 85
external input signals 172
from pre-stored video 78
indicators 30
on an external device 171
proxy data 85
remaining time 71
review 75
shot marks 77
time-lapse video 79
Recording mode 53
special settings indication 31, 32
Red tally indicators 30
REMOTE connector 26
Reset 110, 162
RESET/RETURN button 22
S
Scene file(s)
loading 163
saving 162
SDI IN connector 25
Search
with the essence mark thumbnail screen
95
with the expand thumbnail screen 95
SET button 22
Setup menu 107
basic operations 109
FILE menu 150
MAINTENANCE menu 135
menu list 111
OPERATION menu 112
PAINT menu 129
USER menu 111
SHIFT button 23
Shooting 68
basic operations 74
stop motion animations 81
with Slow & Quick motion 82
Shot data 65
Shot ID 65
Shot mark(s)
adding 106
adding during playback 95
defining names 90
deleting 106
recording 77
Shoulder pad 16
adjusting the position 50
Shoulder strap fitting 16
Shoulder strap, using 49
Shutter
setting 57
speed 57
SHUTTER selector 17
Index
200
Index
Slot cover 24
SLOT SELECT button 25
Speaker 20
Specifications 186
Status information 66
Status screens 66
ASSIGN SWITCH 66
AUDIO 66
BATTERY/MEDIA 67
CAMERA 66
VIDEO 66
STOP button 21
Stopper 28, 29
SxS memory card slots 24
SxS memory cards 68
ejecting 70
formatting 70
loading 69
restoring 72
selecting 70
System configuration 173
T
Tally indicator 28, 29
TALLY indicators 26
TALLY switch 26, 28, 29
TC IN connector 25
TC OUT connector 25
Testing 174
THUMBNAIL button 22
THUMBNAIL indicator 22
THUMBNAIL menu 96
operations 98
Thumbnail screen 91
displaying OK clip thumbnails only 98
displaying the all clips thumbnail 99
Thumbnail(s)
changing the screen type 98
operations 96
Time, setting 41
Timecode 33
setting 62
synchronizing 63
TLCS automatic adjustment 59
TLCS control mode 33
Tripod mount 16
Tripod, mounting 48
U
UHF portable tuner, attaching 45
USB flash drive 73
formatting 73
User bits setting 63
User file(s) 160, 165
User setting data
loading 161
saving 160
V
Video format 101
setting 51
Video level indication 33
Video light, connecting 49
VIDEO OUT connector 25
Viewfinder 29
adjusting focus 39
adjusting position 37
adjusting screen 39
attaching 37
cable 30
cleaning 174
connectors 16
detaching eyepiece 39
fitting shoe 16
HDVF-20A (optional) 28
positioning knob 16
positioning lever 16
positioning ring 16
screen 30
screen display 30
status display 30
Viewfinder cable 29
Voltage capacity 32
VTR SAVE indicator 30
W
WARNING indicator 21
Warnings 176
WHITE BAL switch 19
White balance memory 33
White balance, adjusting 55
Wi-Fi adapter 24
Wireless microphone reception level 32
Write protect 69
Index 201
Index
Z
ZEBRA switch 28, 29
Zoom
position 31
Index
202
Index
The material contained in this manual consists of
information that is the property of Sony
Corporation and is intended solely for use by the
purchasers of the equipment described in this
manual.
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the
duplication of any portion of this manual or the
use thereof for any purpose other than the
operation or maintenance of the equipment
described in this manual without the express
written permission of Sony Corporation.

Navigation menu